copyright · contributors . nekane basabe, basque country university, spain . roger j. booth,...
TRANSCRIPT
Copyright copy 1995 by the American Psychologica1 Association All rights reserved Except as
permitted under the United States Copyright Act of 1976 no part of this publication may be
reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means or sto red in a database or retrieval
system without the prior written permission of the publisher
AlgtPublished by the
American Psychological Association
750 First Street NE
Washington DC 20002
Copies may be ordered from
APA Order Department Best Methods for tl PO Box 2710 Questions Fut Hyattsviacutelle MD 20784 CardiovascuJar Ret
In the UK and Europe copies may be ordered from The Challenge in American Psychologica1 Association Response 3 Henrietta Street Cognition Concepl Covent Gardens London Cognitive Bases of WC2E SLU England Conceptualization Typeset in Minion by University Graphics York PA lnteraction
Printer Braun-Brurnf1eld Inc Ann Arbor MI Developmental Psy
Cover Designer Anne Masters Design Washington DC Emotion and Cultt Cover Illustrator James Yang Emotion Disclosur TechnicaUProduction Editor Edward B Meidenbauer Examining Lives in
Library of Congress Cataloging-in-Publication Data Development Emotion disclosure and health I edited by James W Pennebaker Hostility Coping
p cm Organ Donation al Includes bibliographical references and indexo Factors ISBN 1-55798-308-9 (alk paper) The Perception of ~ 1 Emotions--Health aspects 2 Mental health 3 Self
Perspectives on Soc-disclosure l Pennebaker James W
Psychological TestitRC4554E46E46 1995
61689-dc20 95-16989 Psychology ofWom CIP and Applicatio
Researching CommBritish Library Cataloguing-in-Publication Data Sleep and CognitioA CIP record is available from the BrIacutetish Library
Sleep Onset Norm Printed in the United States ofAmerica Studying Lives Thr First edition
Contributors
Nekane Basabe Basque Country University Spain
Roger J Booth University of Auckland New Zealand
Thomas D Borkovec Pennsylvania State University
Wtlma Bucci Adelphi University
Kathryn P Davison Southern Methodist University
Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez National Autonomous University of Mexico
Eugenia Georges Rice University
Susan Lee Goldman Yale University
Ioseba Iraurgi Basque Country University Spain
John Kinyon Pennsylvania State University
John P Kline University of Arizona
Julie D Lane Uniacuteversity of Virginia
Michael J Mahoney University of North Texas
Gloria Martiacutenez National Autonomous University of Mexico
Jobn D Mayer University of New Hampshire
Viacutector Manuel Meacutendez National Autonomous University of Mexico
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza National Autonomous University of Mexico
Yolanda Olvera National Polyteehnic Institute Mexico City
Dario Paez Basque Country University Spain
Tibor P Palfai Yale University
James W Pennebaker Southern Methodist University
Sara Lidia Peacuterez National Autonomous University of Mexieo
Keith J Petrie University of Auckland New Zealand
Bernard Rimeacute University of Louvaiacuten Belgium
Lizabeth Roemer Pennsylvania State University
Peter Salovey Yale University
Gary E Schwartz University of Arizona
Xt
I
Amparo Silva National Autonomous University of Mexieo
Williarn B Stiles Miarni University Ohio
Harald C Traue University of Ulrn Germany
Carolyn Turvey Yale University
Pablo Valderrarna National Autonomous University of Mexieo
Maite Valdoseda Basque Country University Spain
Carmen Velasco Basque Country University Spain
Daniel M Wegner University of Virginia
Jane Wellenkarnp University of California Los Angeles Emotional upheavals ean
ness rates levels of rumi
following traumatic experiel
eerns how people overeOme t
past deeade psyehologists n4
writing about emotions or Pi
vous system activity immun~
links between disdosure and
sueh links exist is still unkn01
dress SOrne of the most basic i to emotional upheavals in d
event into language affect phl
understanding of disdosure
eost -effeetive ways
The guiding idea of this
of thinkers and researehers t
enees into words ean promot
problem that is not the exdw
ehology Rather if researeher
sure emotion and health wo
personality and health psyeh
anthropology must be eonsid
In order to establish a ee
searehers met at Fort Burgwi
pus in Taos New Mexieo in
induded approximately 40 f~
seleeted on the basis oftheir r4
Preface
Emotional upheavals can disrupt virtually all aspects of our lives Illshy
ness rates levels of rumination and social conflict typically increase
followiacuteng traumatic experiences A central psychological question conshy
cerns how people overcome these events On the basis of research over the
past decade psychologists now have a strong sense that taIking or even
writing about emotions or personal upheavals can boost autonomic nershy
vous system activity immune function and physical health Although the
links between disclosure and health have now been firmly established why
such links exist is still unknown The purpose of this book then is to adshy
dress some of the most basic issues of psychology How do people respond
to emotional upheavals in their Uves and why Why does translating an
event into language affect physical and psychological health How can our
understanding of disclosure and health be applied in clinically useful and
cost-effective ways
The guiding idea of this book was to bring together a diverse group
of thinkers and researchers to address why translating upsetting experishy
ences into words can promote physical and mental health Thiacutes is a broad
problem that is not the exclusive domain of any subdiscipline within psyshy
chology Rather if researchers are to understand the links among discloshy
sure emotion and health work in cognitive physiological cliacutenical social
personality and health psychology as well as allied areas in mediacutecine and
anthropology must be considered
In order to establish a common focus an international group of reshy
searchers met at Fort Burgwin the Southern Methodiacutest University camshy
pus in Taos New Mexico in the summer of 1994 The three-day meeting
included approximately 40 faculty and graduate students who had been
selected on the basis of their research and clinical work related to the broad
xm
PREFACE
p
Intr topic of emotion disdosure and health Following this meeting particishy
pants wrote chapters drawing on their own and others research The fishy
nal product is a series of intriguing perspectives that should be of intershy
est to students researchers dinicians and a generallay audience
This book and the Taos conference could not have been accomplished
without the generous help of Southern Methodist University (SMU) and
the Science Directorate of the American Psychological Association (APA)
From the beginning SMU Deans James Jones and Michael Best have ofshy
fered financial and moral support Within APA 1am indebted to Virginia
Holt and Mary Lynn Skutley for their help The conference itself would
not have been possible without the generous efforts of Nadiacutene Pearce in
the SMU-in-Taos office and the help of the following graduate students
at SMU Michael Crow Kathy Davison Sun-Mee Kang Roberta Mancuso
and Anne Vano Finally the conference coordinator Jane Richards deshy
serves more praise than anyone Since this is not an academy award thankshy
you speech suffice it to say that dozens of others have been invaluable and
have not gone unnoticed
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
DALLAS TEXAS
xiv
Emotion Disclosure and Health An Overview James w Pennebaker
I n the psychological and medicalliteratures there is overwhelming evshy
idence that traumatic experiences provoke mental and physical health problems A central tenet of most psychotherapies is that talking about these experiences is beneficial Indeed meta-analyses of therapy outcomes
indicate that virtually all therapies-irrespective of their theoretical orientation-bring about improvements in both psychological and physshyical health An important nonspecific feature of therapy is that it allows
individuals to translate their experiences into words The disclosure process itself then may be as important as any feedback the client receives from the therapist
Until the mid-1980s the scant psychological research on disclosure focused on interpersonal relationships (Jourard 1971) the role of conshyfession in healing (Frank 1961) the broad value of social support (Cobb
1976) and disclosure within the therapeutic relationship especially as it related to transference (Freud 19201966 Rogers 1951) Occasional studshy
The preparation oC this chapter was made possible in part by a grant from the National Science Founshydation SBR9411674
3
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
ies in anthropology reported that medical healing ceremonies in Native
American African and andent Asian sodeties typically involved sorne
form of confession or diselosure of secrets by the person who was to be
healed (see Georges chapter 2)
For the past S to 8 years a growing nurnber of researchers frorn sevshy
eral disciplines have begun investigating why talking or writing about emoshy
tional upheavals can influence mental and physical health For example
investigators have now found that writing about traumatic experiences
produces improvements in immune function drops in physician visits for
illness and better performance at school and work (eg Esterling Antoni
Fletcher Margulies amp Schneiderman 1994 Pennebaker 1993a Spera
Buhrfeind amp Pennebaker 1994) Similarly other studies indicate that the
failure to talk or acknowledge significant experiences is associated with inshy
creased health problems autonomic activity and ruminations (eg Rimeacute
Mesquita Philippot amp Boca 1991 Wegner 1994) Yet other investigations
frorn the cognitive and eliacutenical realms are now finding that traumatic exshy
periences affect basic cognitive and memory processes (Freyd 1993) and
the abilities to construct coherent narratives (Mahoney 1991)
The increasingly elear links among traumatic experiences emotional
expression cognitive processes and language have been difficult to study
beca use they cross several areas of expertise within psychology The purshy
pose of this book is to briacuteng together a diverse group of thinkers to
address sorne of the central features of the disclosure--health relationship
As suggested by the organization of the book three of these features inshy
elude the cognitive emotional and social dimensions of disc1osure
COGNITIVE PROCESSING IN INHIBITING
AND DISCLOSING
When upheavals occur in our lives we think differently Cornrnon sympshy
torns of thought disruptions incIude rurninating and worrying Why do
these cognitive changes occUr One argurnent that has roots in Freuds
drearn analyses as well as in the Gestalt views of perception is that indishy
viduals are psychologically atternpting to reach elosure or in sorne way
4
resolve the upheaval
1993) Recent worko
The reason that we I
to ruminate about ti mere act of thought
titillating secrets-m
dislodge from our
examining technique~
minating Borkovec
citing evidence to sug
of the same coin Wh closure about the pas
If taIking about tl work One idea is tlJa of structure 10 the exp able to organize strucl
periences and the ever
ses of client disc10sure
urne) proposes that tal First taIking both ref]
over time gradually p1
estingly Bucci (chapte
Coming frorn a psych(
chotherapeutic discou
to the creation of a m
When individuals WI
logical changes OCCUI
talking about trauma
rnuscle tension and s
elosure These biolog
I
~s in Native
olved sorne
o was to be
s from sevshy
aboutemoshy
or example
experiences
an visits for
iacuteng Antoni
193a Spera
ate that the
tedwithinshy
(eg Rimeacute
vestigations
aumatic exshy
11993) and
)
~ emotional
ult to study
iexcly The purshy
kers to
elationship
features inshy
losure
ING
mon sympshy
ng Why do in Freuds
is that indishy
l sorne way
AN OVERVIEW
~
resolve the upheaval (cf Horowitz 1976 Martin Tesser amp McIntosh
1993) Recent work on thought suppression provides another perspective
The reason that we ruminate about events is because we are trying not
to ruminate about them (Wegner amp Lane chapter 3 this volume) The
mere act of thought suppression- whether about distressing traumas or
titillating secrets-makes the thoughts more accessible and difficult to
dislodge from our minds Several ongoing cliacutenical investigations are
examining techniques that may reduce peoples levels of worrying and rushy
minating Borkovec and colleagues (chapter 4 this volume) provide exshy
citing evidence to suggest that disclosure and worry may be opposite sides
of the same coin Whereas future-oriented worry may disrupt health disshy
closure about the past may reduce worrying and improve health
If talking about the past reduces ruminations and worries how does it
work One idea is that translating experiences into words forces sorne kind
of structure to the experiences themselves Through language individuals are
able to organize structure and ultimately assimilate both their emotional exshy
periences and the events that may have provoked the emotions In his analyshy
ses ofcliacuteent disclosure within a therapeutic setting Stiles (chapter 5 this volshy
ume) proposes that talking about an event accomplishes two important goals
First talking both retlects and reduces anxiety Second repeated disclosure
over time gradually promotes the assimilation of the upsetting event Intershy
estingly Bucci (chapter 6 this volume) offers a complementary explanation
Coming from a psychoanalytic perspective she suggests that an effective psyshy
chotherapeutic discourse progresses from a concrete description of an event
to the creation of a more abstract narrative of it
EMOTIONS EXPRESSIVENESS AND
PSYCHOSOMATICS
When individuals write or talk about emotional events important bioshy
logical changes occur During confession in the laboratory for example
taIking about traumas brings about striking reductions in blood pressure
muscle tension and skin conductance during or immediately after the disshy
closure These biological effects are most apparent among participants who
5
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
express emotion Indeed other laboratory studies indicate that long-term
health benefits of disdosure are only apparent if individuals are enshy
couraged to write about or express theIacuter emotions as opposed to providshy
ing factual accounts of their upheavals (Pennebaker 1989) The
disdosure-health link then is c10sely tied into our understanding of emoshy
tions and their biological concomitants
A traditional debate within psychology and psychosomatics has surshy
rounded the definition of emotion Is it more important for example to
consider emotion as a subjective experience or as its expressive or biologshy
ical manifestations As the contributors to this volume indicate this overshy
looks the fact that all components of an emotional experience may have
important hea1th correlates Salovey and his colleagues (in chapter 7 of
this volume) make a compelling case that the subjective ways by which we
perceive and cope with our emotions can influence health and social beshy
haviors Traue (chapter 8 this volume) drawing on the rich and someshy
times controversial assumptions of Harold G Wolff (eg Wolf amp Goodshy
ell 1968) and Wilhelm Reich (1949) provides impressive data that link
inhibited emotional expressiveness in various parts of the body to
headache and back pain In short both subjective experienced emotion
and the bases of emotional expressiveness are tied to health and illness
One reason that researchers in psychology have shied away from studyshy
ing emotion and its links to illness is that they have not known how to
deal with the concept of repression Clinical signs of emotional repression
and denial are observed quite frequently When a friend assures one that
he is happy and relaxed in the midst of an emotional upheaval and at the
same time his facial muscles are rigid and his speech is clipped and hosshy
tile one knows something is amiss A discipline that relies too heavily on
straightforward self-reports cannot by definition see or measure represshy
sion (d Shedler Mayman amp Manis 1993)
The repression or inhibition of emotion is central to an understandshy
ing of disclosure In theory individuals who attempt to confront traumatic
experiences without acknowledging emotions should not benefit and could
perhaps suffer from disclosure The work by Schwartz and Kline (chapter
9 this volume) indicates that individuals who are classified as repressive
6
copers are indeed h
brain wave and even ir ter 10 this volume) ex
but intuitively appeal
repression In their W4
that alexithymics maJ
logical problems Fina
ume) offer an import
function Their chapt4
psychologically relevru
CLINICA
Disclosure of ones dec
nomenon whether in
intimate topics with al
trust between the part
closes personal experie
on the relationship doser Ceel better it ca
1993b)
Within a dinical
emotions can provok(
apist Drawing on a ce volume) suggests that
therapist and dient al
To accomplish this th
emotions as well as to
joint emotional worlc
leagues (chapter 13 ti with clients emotions
help people learn to r
to positive states
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
Contributors
Nekane Basabe Basque Country University Spain
Roger J Booth University of Auckland New Zealand
Thomas D Borkovec Pennsylvania State University
Wtlma Bucci Adelphi University
Kathryn P Davison Southern Methodist University
Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez National Autonomous University of Mexico
Eugenia Georges Rice University
Susan Lee Goldman Yale University
Ioseba Iraurgi Basque Country University Spain
John Kinyon Pennsylvania State University
John P Kline University of Arizona
Julie D Lane Uniacuteversity of Virginia
Michael J Mahoney University of North Texas
Gloria Martiacutenez National Autonomous University of Mexico
Jobn D Mayer University of New Hampshire
Viacutector Manuel Meacutendez National Autonomous University of Mexico
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza National Autonomous University of Mexico
Yolanda Olvera National Polyteehnic Institute Mexico City
Dario Paez Basque Country University Spain
Tibor P Palfai Yale University
James W Pennebaker Southern Methodist University
Sara Lidia Peacuterez National Autonomous University of Mexieo
Keith J Petrie University of Auckland New Zealand
Bernard Rimeacute University of Louvaiacuten Belgium
Lizabeth Roemer Pennsylvania State University
Peter Salovey Yale University
Gary E Schwartz University of Arizona
Xt
I
Amparo Silva National Autonomous University of Mexieo
Williarn B Stiles Miarni University Ohio
Harald C Traue University of Ulrn Germany
Carolyn Turvey Yale University
Pablo Valderrarna National Autonomous University of Mexieo
Maite Valdoseda Basque Country University Spain
Carmen Velasco Basque Country University Spain
Daniel M Wegner University of Virginia
Jane Wellenkarnp University of California Los Angeles Emotional upheavals ean
ness rates levels of rumi
following traumatic experiel
eerns how people overeOme t
past deeade psyehologists n4
writing about emotions or Pi
vous system activity immun~
links between disdosure and
sueh links exist is still unkn01
dress SOrne of the most basic i to emotional upheavals in d
event into language affect phl
understanding of disdosure
eost -effeetive ways
The guiding idea of this
of thinkers and researehers t
enees into words ean promot
problem that is not the exdw
ehology Rather if researeher
sure emotion and health wo
personality and health psyeh
anthropology must be eonsid
In order to establish a ee
searehers met at Fort Burgwi
pus in Taos New Mexieo in
induded approximately 40 f~
seleeted on the basis oftheir r4
Preface
Emotional upheavals can disrupt virtually all aspects of our lives Illshy
ness rates levels of rumination and social conflict typically increase
followiacuteng traumatic experiences A central psychological question conshy
cerns how people overcome these events On the basis of research over the
past decade psychologists now have a strong sense that taIking or even
writing about emotions or personal upheavals can boost autonomic nershy
vous system activity immune function and physical health Although the
links between disclosure and health have now been firmly established why
such links exist is still unknown The purpose of this book then is to adshy
dress some of the most basic issues of psychology How do people respond
to emotional upheavals in their Uves and why Why does translating an
event into language affect physical and psychological health How can our
understanding of disclosure and health be applied in clinically useful and
cost-effective ways
The guiding idea of this book was to bring together a diverse group
of thinkers and researchers to address why translating upsetting experishy
ences into words can promote physical and mental health Thiacutes is a broad
problem that is not the exclusive domain of any subdiscipline within psyshy
chology Rather if researchers are to understand the links among discloshy
sure emotion and health work in cognitive physiological cliacutenical social
personality and health psychology as well as allied areas in mediacutecine and
anthropology must be considered
In order to establish a common focus an international group of reshy
searchers met at Fort Burgwin the Southern Methodiacutest University camshy
pus in Taos New Mexico in the summer of 1994 The three-day meeting
included approximately 40 faculty and graduate students who had been
selected on the basis of their research and clinical work related to the broad
xm
PREFACE
p
Intr topic of emotion disdosure and health Following this meeting particishy
pants wrote chapters drawing on their own and others research The fishy
nal product is a series of intriguing perspectives that should be of intershy
est to students researchers dinicians and a generallay audience
This book and the Taos conference could not have been accomplished
without the generous help of Southern Methodist University (SMU) and
the Science Directorate of the American Psychological Association (APA)
From the beginning SMU Deans James Jones and Michael Best have ofshy
fered financial and moral support Within APA 1am indebted to Virginia
Holt and Mary Lynn Skutley for their help The conference itself would
not have been possible without the generous efforts of Nadiacutene Pearce in
the SMU-in-Taos office and the help of the following graduate students
at SMU Michael Crow Kathy Davison Sun-Mee Kang Roberta Mancuso
and Anne Vano Finally the conference coordinator Jane Richards deshy
serves more praise than anyone Since this is not an academy award thankshy
you speech suffice it to say that dozens of others have been invaluable and
have not gone unnoticed
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
DALLAS TEXAS
xiv
Emotion Disclosure and Health An Overview James w Pennebaker
I n the psychological and medicalliteratures there is overwhelming evshy
idence that traumatic experiences provoke mental and physical health problems A central tenet of most psychotherapies is that talking about these experiences is beneficial Indeed meta-analyses of therapy outcomes
indicate that virtually all therapies-irrespective of their theoretical orientation-bring about improvements in both psychological and physshyical health An important nonspecific feature of therapy is that it allows
individuals to translate their experiences into words The disclosure process itself then may be as important as any feedback the client receives from the therapist
Until the mid-1980s the scant psychological research on disclosure focused on interpersonal relationships (Jourard 1971) the role of conshyfession in healing (Frank 1961) the broad value of social support (Cobb
1976) and disclosure within the therapeutic relationship especially as it related to transference (Freud 19201966 Rogers 1951) Occasional studshy
The preparation oC this chapter was made possible in part by a grant from the National Science Founshydation SBR9411674
3
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
ies in anthropology reported that medical healing ceremonies in Native
American African and andent Asian sodeties typically involved sorne
form of confession or diselosure of secrets by the person who was to be
healed (see Georges chapter 2)
For the past S to 8 years a growing nurnber of researchers frorn sevshy
eral disciplines have begun investigating why talking or writing about emoshy
tional upheavals can influence mental and physical health For example
investigators have now found that writing about traumatic experiences
produces improvements in immune function drops in physician visits for
illness and better performance at school and work (eg Esterling Antoni
Fletcher Margulies amp Schneiderman 1994 Pennebaker 1993a Spera
Buhrfeind amp Pennebaker 1994) Similarly other studies indicate that the
failure to talk or acknowledge significant experiences is associated with inshy
creased health problems autonomic activity and ruminations (eg Rimeacute
Mesquita Philippot amp Boca 1991 Wegner 1994) Yet other investigations
frorn the cognitive and eliacutenical realms are now finding that traumatic exshy
periences affect basic cognitive and memory processes (Freyd 1993) and
the abilities to construct coherent narratives (Mahoney 1991)
The increasingly elear links among traumatic experiences emotional
expression cognitive processes and language have been difficult to study
beca use they cross several areas of expertise within psychology The purshy
pose of this book is to briacuteng together a diverse group of thinkers to
address sorne of the central features of the disclosure--health relationship
As suggested by the organization of the book three of these features inshy
elude the cognitive emotional and social dimensions of disc1osure
COGNITIVE PROCESSING IN INHIBITING
AND DISCLOSING
When upheavals occur in our lives we think differently Cornrnon sympshy
torns of thought disruptions incIude rurninating and worrying Why do
these cognitive changes occUr One argurnent that has roots in Freuds
drearn analyses as well as in the Gestalt views of perception is that indishy
viduals are psychologically atternpting to reach elosure or in sorne way
4
resolve the upheaval
1993) Recent worko
The reason that we I
to ruminate about ti mere act of thought
titillating secrets-m
dislodge from our
examining technique~
minating Borkovec
citing evidence to sug
of the same coin Wh closure about the pas
If taIking about tl work One idea is tlJa of structure 10 the exp able to organize strucl
periences and the ever
ses of client disc10sure
urne) proposes that tal First taIking both ref]
over time gradually p1
estingly Bucci (chapte
Coming frorn a psych(
chotherapeutic discou
to the creation of a m
When individuals WI
logical changes OCCUI
talking about trauma
rnuscle tension and s
elosure These biolog
I
~s in Native
olved sorne
o was to be
s from sevshy
aboutemoshy
or example
experiences
an visits for
iacuteng Antoni
193a Spera
ate that the
tedwithinshy
(eg Rimeacute
vestigations
aumatic exshy
11993) and
)
~ emotional
ult to study
iexcly The purshy
kers to
elationship
features inshy
losure
ING
mon sympshy
ng Why do in Freuds
is that indishy
l sorne way
AN OVERVIEW
~
resolve the upheaval (cf Horowitz 1976 Martin Tesser amp McIntosh
1993) Recent work on thought suppression provides another perspective
The reason that we ruminate about events is because we are trying not
to ruminate about them (Wegner amp Lane chapter 3 this volume) The
mere act of thought suppression- whether about distressing traumas or
titillating secrets-makes the thoughts more accessible and difficult to
dislodge from our minds Several ongoing cliacutenical investigations are
examining techniques that may reduce peoples levels of worrying and rushy
minating Borkovec and colleagues (chapter 4 this volume) provide exshy
citing evidence to suggest that disclosure and worry may be opposite sides
of the same coin Whereas future-oriented worry may disrupt health disshy
closure about the past may reduce worrying and improve health
If talking about the past reduces ruminations and worries how does it
work One idea is that translating experiences into words forces sorne kind
of structure to the experiences themselves Through language individuals are
able to organize structure and ultimately assimilate both their emotional exshy
periences and the events that may have provoked the emotions In his analyshy
ses ofcliacuteent disclosure within a therapeutic setting Stiles (chapter 5 this volshy
ume) proposes that talking about an event accomplishes two important goals
First talking both retlects and reduces anxiety Second repeated disclosure
over time gradually promotes the assimilation of the upsetting event Intershy
estingly Bucci (chapter 6 this volume) offers a complementary explanation
Coming from a psychoanalytic perspective she suggests that an effective psyshy
chotherapeutic discourse progresses from a concrete description of an event
to the creation of a more abstract narrative of it
EMOTIONS EXPRESSIVENESS AND
PSYCHOSOMATICS
When individuals write or talk about emotional events important bioshy
logical changes occur During confession in the laboratory for example
taIking about traumas brings about striking reductions in blood pressure
muscle tension and skin conductance during or immediately after the disshy
closure These biological effects are most apparent among participants who
5
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
express emotion Indeed other laboratory studies indicate that long-term
health benefits of disdosure are only apparent if individuals are enshy
couraged to write about or express theIacuter emotions as opposed to providshy
ing factual accounts of their upheavals (Pennebaker 1989) The
disdosure-health link then is c10sely tied into our understanding of emoshy
tions and their biological concomitants
A traditional debate within psychology and psychosomatics has surshy
rounded the definition of emotion Is it more important for example to
consider emotion as a subjective experience or as its expressive or biologshy
ical manifestations As the contributors to this volume indicate this overshy
looks the fact that all components of an emotional experience may have
important hea1th correlates Salovey and his colleagues (in chapter 7 of
this volume) make a compelling case that the subjective ways by which we
perceive and cope with our emotions can influence health and social beshy
haviors Traue (chapter 8 this volume) drawing on the rich and someshy
times controversial assumptions of Harold G Wolff (eg Wolf amp Goodshy
ell 1968) and Wilhelm Reich (1949) provides impressive data that link
inhibited emotional expressiveness in various parts of the body to
headache and back pain In short both subjective experienced emotion
and the bases of emotional expressiveness are tied to health and illness
One reason that researchers in psychology have shied away from studyshy
ing emotion and its links to illness is that they have not known how to
deal with the concept of repression Clinical signs of emotional repression
and denial are observed quite frequently When a friend assures one that
he is happy and relaxed in the midst of an emotional upheaval and at the
same time his facial muscles are rigid and his speech is clipped and hosshy
tile one knows something is amiss A discipline that relies too heavily on
straightforward self-reports cannot by definition see or measure represshy
sion (d Shedler Mayman amp Manis 1993)
The repression or inhibition of emotion is central to an understandshy
ing of disclosure In theory individuals who attempt to confront traumatic
experiences without acknowledging emotions should not benefit and could
perhaps suffer from disclosure The work by Schwartz and Kline (chapter
9 this volume) indicates that individuals who are classified as repressive
6
copers are indeed h
brain wave and even ir ter 10 this volume) ex
but intuitively appeal
repression In their W4
that alexithymics maJ
logical problems Fina
ume) offer an import
function Their chapt4
psychologically relevru
CLINICA
Disclosure of ones dec
nomenon whether in
intimate topics with al
trust between the part
closes personal experie
on the relationship doser Ceel better it ca
1993b)
Within a dinical
emotions can provok(
apist Drawing on a ce volume) suggests that
therapist and dient al
To accomplish this th
emotions as well as to
joint emotional worlc
leagues (chapter 13 ti with clients emotions
help people learn to r
to positive states
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
I
Amparo Silva National Autonomous University of Mexieo
Williarn B Stiles Miarni University Ohio
Harald C Traue University of Ulrn Germany
Carolyn Turvey Yale University
Pablo Valderrarna National Autonomous University of Mexieo
Maite Valdoseda Basque Country University Spain
Carmen Velasco Basque Country University Spain
Daniel M Wegner University of Virginia
Jane Wellenkarnp University of California Los Angeles Emotional upheavals ean
ness rates levels of rumi
following traumatic experiel
eerns how people overeOme t
past deeade psyehologists n4
writing about emotions or Pi
vous system activity immun~
links between disdosure and
sueh links exist is still unkn01
dress SOrne of the most basic i to emotional upheavals in d
event into language affect phl
understanding of disdosure
eost -effeetive ways
The guiding idea of this
of thinkers and researehers t
enees into words ean promot
problem that is not the exdw
ehology Rather if researeher
sure emotion and health wo
personality and health psyeh
anthropology must be eonsid
In order to establish a ee
searehers met at Fort Burgwi
pus in Taos New Mexieo in
induded approximately 40 f~
seleeted on the basis oftheir r4
Preface
Emotional upheavals can disrupt virtually all aspects of our lives Illshy
ness rates levels of rumination and social conflict typically increase
followiacuteng traumatic experiences A central psychological question conshy
cerns how people overcome these events On the basis of research over the
past decade psychologists now have a strong sense that taIking or even
writing about emotions or personal upheavals can boost autonomic nershy
vous system activity immune function and physical health Although the
links between disclosure and health have now been firmly established why
such links exist is still unknown The purpose of this book then is to adshy
dress some of the most basic issues of psychology How do people respond
to emotional upheavals in their Uves and why Why does translating an
event into language affect physical and psychological health How can our
understanding of disclosure and health be applied in clinically useful and
cost-effective ways
The guiding idea of this book was to bring together a diverse group
of thinkers and researchers to address why translating upsetting experishy
ences into words can promote physical and mental health Thiacutes is a broad
problem that is not the exclusive domain of any subdiscipline within psyshy
chology Rather if researchers are to understand the links among discloshy
sure emotion and health work in cognitive physiological cliacutenical social
personality and health psychology as well as allied areas in mediacutecine and
anthropology must be considered
In order to establish a common focus an international group of reshy
searchers met at Fort Burgwin the Southern Methodiacutest University camshy
pus in Taos New Mexico in the summer of 1994 The three-day meeting
included approximately 40 faculty and graduate students who had been
selected on the basis of their research and clinical work related to the broad
xm
PREFACE
p
Intr topic of emotion disdosure and health Following this meeting particishy
pants wrote chapters drawing on their own and others research The fishy
nal product is a series of intriguing perspectives that should be of intershy
est to students researchers dinicians and a generallay audience
This book and the Taos conference could not have been accomplished
without the generous help of Southern Methodist University (SMU) and
the Science Directorate of the American Psychological Association (APA)
From the beginning SMU Deans James Jones and Michael Best have ofshy
fered financial and moral support Within APA 1am indebted to Virginia
Holt and Mary Lynn Skutley for their help The conference itself would
not have been possible without the generous efforts of Nadiacutene Pearce in
the SMU-in-Taos office and the help of the following graduate students
at SMU Michael Crow Kathy Davison Sun-Mee Kang Roberta Mancuso
and Anne Vano Finally the conference coordinator Jane Richards deshy
serves more praise than anyone Since this is not an academy award thankshy
you speech suffice it to say that dozens of others have been invaluable and
have not gone unnoticed
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
DALLAS TEXAS
xiv
Emotion Disclosure and Health An Overview James w Pennebaker
I n the psychological and medicalliteratures there is overwhelming evshy
idence that traumatic experiences provoke mental and physical health problems A central tenet of most psychotherapies is that talking about these experiences is beneficial Indeed meta-analyses of therapy outcomes
indicate that virtually all therapies-irrespective of their theoretical orientation-bring about improvements in both psychological and physshyical health An important nonspecific feature of therapy is that it allows
individuals to translate their experiences into words The disclosure process itself then may be as important as any feedback the client receives from the therapist
Until the mid-1980s the scant psychological research on disclosure focused on interpersonal relationships (Jourard 1971) the role of conshyfession in healing (Frank 1961) the broad value of social support (Cobb
1976) and disclosure within the therapeutic relationship especially as it related to transference (Freud 19201966 Rogers 1951) Occasional studshy
The preparation oC this chapter was made possible in part by a grant from the National Science Founshydation SBR9411674
3
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
ies in anthropology reported that medical healing ceremonies in Native
American African and andent Asian sodeties typically involved sorne
form of confession or diselosure of secrets by the person who was to be
healed (see Georges chapter 2)
For the past S to 8 years a growing nurnber of researchers frorn sevshy
eral disciplines have begun investigating why talking or writing about emoshy
tional upheavals can influence mental and physical health For example
investigators have now found that writing about traumatic experiences
produces improvements in immune function drops in physician visits for
illness and better performance at school and work (eg Esterling Antoni
Fletcher Margulies amp Schneiderman 1994 Pennebaker 1993a Spera
Buhrfeind amp Pennebaker 1994) Similarly other studies indicate that the
failure to talk or acknowledge significant experiences is associated with inshy
creased health problems autonomic activity and ruminations (eg Rimeacute
Mesquita Philippot amp Boca 1991 Wegner 1994) Yet other investigations
frorn the cognitive and eliacutenical realms are now finding that traumatic exshy
periences affect basic cognitive and memory processes (Freyd 1993) and
the abilities to construct coherent narratives (Mahoney 1991)
The increasingly elear links among traumatic experiences emotional
expression cognitive processes and language have been difficult to study
beca use they cross several areas of expertise within psychology The purshy
pose of this book is to briacuteng together a diverse group of thinkers to
address sorne of the central features of the disclosure--health relationship
As suggested by the organization of the book three of these features inshy
elude the cognitive emotional and social dimensions of disc1osure
COGNITIVE PROCESSING IN INHIBITING
AND DISCLOSING
When upheavals occur in our lives we think differently Cornrnon sympshy
torns of thought disruptions incIude rurninating and worrying Why do
these cognitive changes occUr One argurnent that has roots in Freuds
drearn analyses as well as in the Gestalt views of perception is that indishy
viduals are psychologically atternpting to reach elosure or in sorne way
4
resolve the upheaval
1993) Recent worko
The reason that we I
to ruminate about ti mere act of thought
titillating secrets-m
dislodge from our
examining technique~
minating Borkovec
citing evidence to sug
of the same coin Wh closure about the pas
If taIking about tl work One idea is tlJa of structure 10 the exp able to organize strucl
periences and the ever
ses of client disc10sure
urne) proposes that tal First taIking both ref]
over time gradually p1
estingly Bucci (chapte
Coming frorn a psych(
chotherapeutic discou
to the creation of a m
When individuals WI
logical changes OCCUI
talking about trauma
rnuscle tension and s
elosure These biolog
I
~s in Native
olved sorne
o was to be
s from sevshy
aboutemoshy
or example
experiences
an visits for
iacuteng Antoni
193a Spera
ate that the
tedwithinshy
(eg Rimeacute
vestigations
aumatic exshy
11993) and
)
~ emotional
ult to study
iexcly The purshy
kers to
elationship
features inshy
losure
ING
mon sympshy
ng Why do in Freuds
is that indishy
l sorne way
AN OVERVIEW
~
resolve the upheaval (cf Horowitz 1976 Martin Tesser amp McIntosh
1993) Recent work on thought suppression provides another perspective
The reason that we ruminate about events is because we are trying not
to ruminate about them (Wegner amp Lane chapter 3 this volume) The
mere act of thought suppression- whether about distressing traumas or
titillating secrets-makes the thoughts more accessible and difficult to
dislodge from our minds Several ongoing cliacutenical investigations are
examining techniques that may reduce peoples levels of worrying and rushy
minating Borkovec and colleagues (chapter 4 this volume) provide exshy
citing evidence to suggest that disclosure and worry may be opposite sides
of the same coin Whereas future-oriented worry may disrupt health disshy
closure about the past may reduce worrying and improve health
If talking about the past reduces ruminations and worries how does it
work One idea is that translating experiences into words forces sorne kind
of structure to the experiences themselves Through language individuals are
able to organize structure and ultimately assimilate both their emotional exshy
periences and the events that may have provoked the emotions In his analyshy
ses ofcliacuteent disclosure within a therapeutic setting Stiles (chapter 5 this volshy
ume) proposes that talking about an event accomplishes two important goals
First talking both retlects and reduces anxiety Second repeated disclosure
over time gradually promotes the assimilation of the upsetting event Intershy
estingly Bucci (chapter 6 this volume) offers a complementary explanation
Coming from a psychoanalytic perspective she suggests that an effective psyshy
chotherapeutic discourse progresses from a concrete description of an event
to the creation of a more abstract narrative of it
EMOTIONS EXPRESSIVENESS AND
PSYCHOSOMATICS
When individuals write or talk about emotional events important bioshy
logical changes occur During confession in the laboratory for example
taIking about traumas brings about striking reductions in blood pressure
muscle tension and skin conductance during or immediately after the disshy
closure These biological effects are most apparent among participants who
5
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
express emotion Indeed other laboratory studies indicate that long-term
health benefits of disdosure are only apparent if individuals are enshy
couraged to write about or express theIacuter emotions as opposed to providshy
ing factual accounts of their upheavals (Pennebaker 1989) The
disdosure-health link then is c10sely tied into our understanding of emoshy
tions and their biological concomitants
A traditional debate within psychology and psychosomatics has surshy
rounded the definition of emotion Is it more important for example to
consider emotion as a subjective experience or as its expressive or biologshy
ical manifestations As the contributors to this volume indicate this overshy
looks the fact that all components of an emotional experience may have
important hea1th correlates Salovey and his colleagues (in chapter 7 of
this volume) make a compelling case that the subjective ways by which we
perceive and cope with our emotions can influence health and social beshy
haviors Traue (chapter 8 this volume) drawing on the rich and someshy
times controversial assumptions of Harold G Wolff (eg Wolf amp Goodshy
ell 1968) and Wilhelm Reich (1949) provides impressive data that link
inhibited emotional expressiveness in various parts of the body to
headache and back pain In short both subjective experienced emotion
and the bases of emotional expressiveness are tied to health and illness
One reason that researchers in psychology have shied away from studyshy
ing emotion and its links to illness is that they have not known how to
deal with the concept of repression Clinical signs of emotional repression
and denial are observed quite frequently When a friend assures one that
he is happy and relaxed in the midst of an emotional upheaval and at the
same time his facial muscles are rigid and his speech is clipped and hosshy
tile one knows something is amiss A discipline that relies too heavily on
straightforward self-reports cannot by definition see or measure represshy
sion (d Shedler Mayman amp Manis 1993)
The repression or inhibition of emotion is central to an understandshy
ing of disclosure In theory individuals who attempt to confront traumatic
experiences without acknowledging emotions should not benefit and could
perhaps suffer from disclosure The work by Schwartz and Kline (chapter
9 this volume) indicates that individuals who are classified as repressive
6
copers are indeed h
brain wave and even ir ter 10 this volume) ex
but intuitively appeal
repression In their W4
that alexithymics maJ
logical problems Fina
ume) offer an import
function Their chapt4
psychologically relevru
CLINICA
Disclosure of ones dec
nomenon whether in
intimate topics with al
trust between the part
closes personal experie
on the relationship doser Ceel better it ca
1993b)
Within a dinical
emotions can provok(
apist Drawing on a ce volume) suggests that
therapist and dient al
To accomplish this th
emotions as well as to
joint emotional worlc
leagues (chapter 13 ti with clients emotions
help people learn to r
to positive states
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
Preface
Emotional upheavals can disrupt virtually all aspects of our lives Illshy
ness rates levels of rumination and social conflict typically increase
followiacuteng traumatic experiences A central psychological question conshy
cerns how people overcome these events On the basis of research over the
past decade psychologists now have a strong sense that taIking or even
writing about emotions or personal upheavals can boost autonomic nershy
vous system activity immune function and physical health Although the
links between disclosure and health have now been firmly established why
such links exist is still unknown The purpose of this book then is to adshy
dress some of the most basic issues of psychology How do people respond
to emotional upheavals in their Uves and why Why does translating an
event into language affect physical and psychological health How can our
understanding of disclosure and health be applied in clinically useful and
cost-effective ways
The guiding idea of this book was to bring together a diverse group
of thinkers and researchers to address why translating upsetting experishy
ences into words can promote physical and mental health Thiacutes is a broad
problem that is not the exclusive domain of any subdiscipline within psyshy
chology Rather if researchers are to understand the links among discloshy
sure emotion and health work in cognitive physiological cliacutenical social
personality and health psychology as well as allied areas in mediacutecine and
anthropology must be considered
In order to establish a common focus an international group of reshy
searchers met at Fort Burgwin the Southern Methodiacutest University camshy
pus in Taos New Mexico in the summer of 1994 The three-day meeting
included approximately 40 faculty and graduate students who had been
selected on the basis of their research and clinical work related to the broad
xm
PREFACE
p
Intr topic of emotion disdosure and health Following this meeting particishy
pants wrote chapters drawing on their own and others research The fishy
nal product is a series of intriguing perspectives that should be of intershy
est to students researchers dinicians and a generallay audience
This book and the Taos conference could not have been accomplished
without the generous help of Southern Methodist University (SMU) and
the Science Directorate of the American Psychological Association (APA)
From the beginning SMU Deans James Jones and Michael Best have ofshy
fered financial and moral support Within APA 1am indebted to Virginia
Holt and Mary Lynn Skutley for their help The conference itself would
not have been possible without the generous efforts of Nadiacutene Pearce in
the SMU-in-Taos office and the help of the following graduate students
at SMU Michael Crow Kathy Davison Sun-Mee Kang Roberta Mancuso
and Anne Vano Finally the conference coordinator Jane Richards deshy
serves more praise than anyone Since this is not an academy award thankshy
you speech suffice it to say that dozens of others have been invaluable and
have not gone unnoticed
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
DALLAS TEXAS
xiv
Emotion Disclosure and Health An Overview James w Pennebaker
I n the psychological and medicalliteratures there is overwhelming evshy
idence that traumatic experiences provoke mental and physical health problems A central tenet of most psychotherapies is that talking about these experiences is beneficial Indeed meta-analyses of therapy outcomes
indicate that virtually all therapies-irrespective of their theoretical orientation-bring about improvements in both psychological and physshyical health An important nonspecific feature of therapy is that it allows
individuals to translate their experiences into words The disclosure process itself then may be as important as any feedback the client receives from the therapist
Until the mid-1980s the scant psychological research on disclosure focused on interpersonal relationships (Jourard 1971) the role of conshyfession in healing (Frank 1961) the broad value of social support (Cobb
1976) and disclosure within the therapeutic relationship especially as it related to transference (Freud 19201966 Rogers 1951) Occasional studshy
The preparation oC this chapter was made possible in part by a grant from the National Science Founshydation SBR9411674
3
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
ies in anthropology reported that medical healing ceremonies in Native
American African and andent Asian sodeties typically involved sorne
form of confession or diselosure of secrets by the person who was to be
healed (see Georges chapter 2)
For the past S to 8 years a growing nurnber of researchers frorn sevshy
eral disciplines have begun investigating why talking or writing about emoshy
tional upheavals can influence mental and physical health For example
investigators have now found that writing about traumatic experiences
produces improvements in immune function drops in physician visits for
illness and better performance at school and work (eg Esterling Antoni
Fletcher Margulies amp Schneiderman 1994 Pennebaker 1993a Spera
Buhrfeind amp Pennebaker 1994) Similarly other studies indicate that the
failure to talk or acknowledge significant experiences is associated with inshy
creased health problems autonomic activity and ruminations (eg Rimeacute
Mesquita Philippot amp Boca 1991 Wegner 1994) Yet other investigations
frorn the cognitive and eliacutenical realms are now finding that traumatic exshy
periences affect basic cognitive and memory processes (Freyd 1993) and
the abilities to construct coherent narratives (Mahoney 1991)
The increasingly elear links among traumatic experiences emotional
expression cognitive processes and language have been difficult to study
beca use they cross several areas of expertise within psychology The purshy
pose of this book is to briacuteng together a diverse group of thinkers to
address sorne of the central features of the disclosure--health relationship
As suggested by the organization of the book three of these features inshy
elude the cognitive emotional and social dimensions of disc1osure
COGNITIVE PROCESSING IN INHIBITING
AND DISCLOSING
When upheavals occur in our lives we think differently Cornrnon sympshy
torns of thought disruptions incIude rurninating and worrying Why do
these cognitive changes occUr One argurnent that has roots in Freuds
drearn analyses as well as in the Gestalt views of perception is that indishy
viduals are psychologically atternpting to reach elosure or in sorne way
4
resolve the upheaval
1993) Recent worko
The reason that we I
to ruminate about ti mere act of thought
titillating secrets-m
dislodge from our
examining technique~
minating Borkovec
citing evidence to sug
of the same coin Wh closure about the pas
If taIking about tl work One idea is tlJa of structure 10 the exp able to organize strucl
periences and the ever
ses of client disc10sure
urne) proposes that tal First taIking both ref]
over time gradually p1
estingly Bucci (chapte
Coming frorn a psych(
chotherapeutic discou
to the creation of a m
When individuals WI
logical changes OCCUI
talking about trauma
rnuscle tension and s
elosure These biolog
I
~s in Native
olved sorne
o was to be
s from sevshy
aboutemoshy
or example
experiences
an visits for
iacuteng Antoni
193a Spera
ate that the
tedwithinshy
(eg Rimeacute
vestigations
aumatic exshy
11993) and
)
~ emotional
ult to study
iexcly The purshy
kers to
elationship
features inshy
losure
ING
mon sympshy
ng Why do in Freuds
is that indishy
l sorne way
AN OVERVIEW
~
resolve the upheaval (cf Horowitz 1976 Martin Tesser amp McIntosh
1993) Recent work on thought suppression provides another perspective
The reason that we ruminate about events is because we are trying not
to ruminate about them (Wegner amp Lane chapter 3 this volume) The
mere act of thought suppression- whether about distressing traumas or
titillating secrets-makes the thoughts more accessible and difficult to
dislodge from our minds Several ongoing cliacutenical investigations are
examining techniques that may reduce peoples levels of worrying and rushy
minating Borkovec and colleagues (chapter 4 this volume) provide exshy
citing evidence to suggest that disclosure and worry may be opposite sides
of the same coin Whereas future-oriented worry may disrupt health disshy
closure about the past may reduce worrying and improve health
If talking about the past reduces ruminations and worries how does it
work One idea is that translating experiences into words forces sorne kind
of structure to the experiences themselves Through language individuals are
able to organize structure and ultimately assimilate both their emotional exshy
periences and the events that may have provoked the emotions In his analyshy
ses ofcliacuteent disclosure within a therapeutic setting Stiles (chapter 5 this volshy
ume) proposes that talking about an event accomplishes two important goals
First talking both retlects and reduces anxiety Second repeated disclosure
over time gradually promotes the assimilation of the upsetting event Intershy
estingly Bucci (chapter 6 this volume) offers a complementary explanation
Coming from a psychoanalytic perspective she suggests that an effective psyshy
chotherapeutic discourse progresses from a concrete description of an event
to the creation of a more abstract narrative of it
EMOTIONS EXPRESSIVENESS AND
PSYCHOSOMATICS
When individuals write or talk about emotional events important bioshy
logical changes occur During confession in the laboratory for example
taIking about traumas brings about striking reductions in blood pressure
muscle tension and skin conductance during or immediately after the disshy
closure These biological effects are most apparent among participants who
5
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
express emotion Indeed other laboratory studies indicate that long-term
health benefits of disdosure are only apparent if individuals are enshy
couraged to write about or express theIacuter emotions as opposed to providshy
ing factual accounts of their upheavals (Pennebaker 1989) The
disdosure-health link then is c10sely tied into our understanding of emoshy
tions and their biological concomitants
A traditional debate within psychology and psychosomatics has surshy
rounded the definition of emotion Is it more important for example to
consider emotion as a subjective experience or as its expressive or biologshy
ical manifestations As the contributors to this volume indicate this overshy
looks the fact that all components of an emotional experience may have
important hea1th correlates Salovey and his colleagues (in chapter 7 of
this volume) make a compelling case that the subjective ways by which we
perceive and cope with our emotions can influence health and social beshy
haviors Traue (chapter 8 this volume) drawing on the rich and someshy
times controversial assumptions of Harold G Wolff (eg Wolf amp Goodshy
ell 1968) and Wilhelm Reich (1949) provides impressive data that link
inhibited emotional expressiveness in various parts of the body to
headache and back pain In short both subjective experienced emotion
and the bases of emotional expressiveness are tied to health and illness
One reason that researchers in psychology have shied away from studyshy
ing emotion and its links to illness is that they have not known how to
deal with the concept of repression Clinical signs of emotional repression
and denial are observed quite frequently When a friend assures one that
he is happy and relaxed in the midst of an emotional upheaval and at the
same time his facial muscles are rigid and his speech is clipped and hosshy
tile one knows something is amiss A discipline that relies too heavily on
straightforward self-reports cannot by definition see or measure represshy
sion (d Shedler Mayman amp Manis 1993)
The repression or inhibition of emotion is central to an understandshy
ing of disclosure In theory individuals who attempt to confront traumatic
experiences without acknowledging emotions should not benefit and could
perhaps suffer from disclosure The work by Schwartz and Kline (chapter
9 this volume) indicates that individuals who are classified as repressive
6
copers are indeed h
brain wave and even ir ter 10 this volume) ex
but intuitively appeal
repression In their W4
that alexithymics maJ
logical problems Fina
ume) offer an import
function Their chapt4
psychologically relevru
CLINICA
Disclosure of ones dec
nomenon whether in
intimate topics with al
trust between the part
closes personal experie
on the relationship doser Ceel better it ca
1993b)
Within a dinical
emotions can provok(
apist Drawing on a ce volume) suggests that
therapist and dient al
To accomplish this th
emotions as well as to
joint emotional worlc
leagues (chapter 13 ti with clients emotions
help people learn to r
to positive states
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
PREFACE
p
Intr topic of emotion disdosure and health Following this meeting particishy
pants wrote chapters drawing on their own and others research The fishy
nal product is a series of intriguing perspectives that should be of intershy
est to students researchers dinicians and a generallay audience
This book and the Taos conference could not have been accomplished
without the generous help of Southern Methodist University (SMU) and
the Science Directorate of the American Psychological Association (APA)
From the beginning SMU Deans James Jones and Michael Best have ofshy
fered financial and moral support Within APA 1am indebted to Virginia
Holt and Mary Lynn Skutley for their help The conference itself would
not have been possible without the generous efforts of Nadiacutene Pearce in
the SMU-in-Taos office and the help of the following graduate students
at SMU Michael Crow Kathy Davison Sun-Mee Kang Roberta Mancuso
and Anne Vano Finally the conference coordinator Jane Richards deshy
serves more praise than anyone Since this is not an academy award thankshy
you speech suffice it to say that dozens of others have been invaluable and
have not gone unnoticed
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
DALLAS TEXAS
xiv
Emotion Disclosure and Health An Overview James w Pennebaker
I n the psychological and medicalliteratures there is overwhelming evshy
idence that traumatic experiences provoke mental and physical health problems A central tenet of most psychotherapies is that talking about these experiences is beneficial Indeed meta-analyses of therapy outcomes
indicate that virtually all therapies-irrespective of their theoretical orientation-bring about improvements in both psychological and physshyical health An important nonspecific feature of therapy is that it allows
individuals to translate their experiences into words The disclosure process itself then may be as important as any feedback the client receives from the therapist
Until the mid-1980s the scant psychological research on disclosure focused on interpersonal relationships (Jourard 1971) the role of conshyfession in healing (Frank 1961) the broad value of social support (Cobb
1976) and disclosure within the therapeutic relationship especially as it related to transference (Freud 19201966 Rogers 1951) Occasional studshy
The preparation oC this chapter was made possible in part by a grant from the National Science Founshydation SBR9411674
3
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
ies in anthropology reported that medical healing ceremonies in Native
American African and andent Asian sodeties typically involved sorne
form of confession or diselosure of secrets by the person who was to be
healed (see Georges chapter 2)
For the past S to 8 years a growing nurnber of researchers frorn sevshy
eral disciplines have begun investigating why talking or writing about emoshy
tional upheavals can influence mental and physical health For example
investigators have now found that writing about traumatic experiences
produces improvements in immune function drops in physician visits for
illness and better performance at school and work (eg Esterling Antoni
Fletcher Margulies amp Schneiderman 1994 Pennebaker 1993a Spera
Buhrfeind amp Pennebaker 1994) Similarly other studies indicate that the
failure to talk or acknowledge significant experiences is associated with inshy
creased health problems autonomic activity and ruminations (eg Rimeacute
Mesquita Philippot amp Boca 1991 Wegner 1994) Yet other investigations
frorn the cognitive and eliacutenical realms are now finding that traumatic exshy
periences affect basic cognitive and memory processes (Freyd 1993) and
the abilities to construct coherent narratives (Mahoney 1991)
The increasingly elear links among traumatic experiences emotional
expression cognitive processes and language have been difficult to study
beca use they cross several areas of expertise within psychology The purshy
pose of this book is to briacuteng together a diverse group of thinkers to
address sorne of the central features of the disclosure--health relationship
As suggested by the organization of the book three of these features inshy
elude the cognitive emotional and social dimensions of disc1osure
COGNITIVE PROCESSING IN INHIBITING
AND DISCLOSING
When upheavals occur in our lives we think differently Cornrnon sympshy
torns of thought disruptions incIude rurninating and worrying Why do
these cognitive changes occUr One argurnent that has roots in Freuds
drearn analyses as well as in the Gestalt views of perception is that indishy
viduals are psychologically atternpting to reach elosure or in sorne way
4
resolve the upheaval
1993) Recent worko
The reason that we I
to ruminate about ti mere act of thought
titillating secrets-m
dislodge from our
examining technique~
minating Borkovec
citing evidence to sug
of the same coin Wh closure about the pas
If taIking about tl work One idea is tlJa of structure 10 the exp able to organize strucl
periences and the ever
ses of client disc10sure
urne) proposes that tal First taIking both ref]
over time gradually p1
estingly Bucci (chapte
Coming frorn a psych(
chotherapeutic discou
to the creation of a m
When individuals WI
logical changes OCCUI
talking about trauma
rnuscle tension and s
elosure These biolog
I
~s in Native
olved sorne
o was to be
s from sevshy
aboutemoshy
or example
experiences
an visits for
iacuteng Antoni
193a Spera
ate that the
tedwithinshy
(eg Rimeacute
vestigations
aumatic exshy
11993) and
)
~ emotional
ult to study
iexcly The purshy
kers to
elationship
features inshy
losure
ING
mon sympshy
ng Why do in Freuds
is that indishy
l sorne way
AN OVERVIEW
~
resolve the upheaval (cf Horowitz 1976 Martin Tesser amp McIntosh
1993) Recent work on thought suppression provides another perspective
The reason that we ruminate about events is because we are trying not
to ruminate about them (Wegner amp Lane chapter 3 this volume) The
mere act of thought suppression- whether about distressing traumas or
titillating secrets-makes the thoughts more accessible and difficult to
dislodge from our minds Several ongoing cliacutenical investigations are
examining techniques that may reduce peoples levels of worrying and rushy
minating Borkovec and colleagues (chapter 4 this volume) provide exshy
citing evidence to suggest that disclosure and worry may be opposite sides
of the same coin Whereas future-oriented worry may disrupt health disshy
closure about the past may reduce worrying and improve health
If talking about the past reduces ruminations and worries how does it
work One idea is that translating experiences into words forces sorne kind
of structure to the experiences themselves Through language individuals are
able to organize structure and ultimately assimilate both their emotional exshy
periences and the events that may have provoked the emotions In his analyshy
ses ofcliacuteent disclosure within a therapeutic setting Stiles (chapter 5 this volshy
ume) proposes that talking about an event accomplishes two important goals
First talking both retlects and reduces anxiety Second repeated disclosure
over time gradually promotes the assimilation of the upsetting event Intershy
estingly Bucci (chapter 6 this volume) offers a complementary explanation
Coming from a psychoanalytic perspective she suggests that an effective psyshy
chotherapeutic discourse progresses from a concrete description of an event
to the creation of a more abstract narrative of it
EMOTIONS EXPRESSIVENESS AND
PSYCHOSOMATICS
When individuals write or talk about emotional events important bioshy
logical changes occur During confession in the laboratory for example
taIking about traumas brings about striking reductions in blood pressure
muscle tension and skin conductance during or immediately after the disshy
closure These biological effects are most apparent among participants who
5
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
express emotion Indeed other laboratory studies indicate that long-term
health benefits of disdosure are only apparent if individuals are enshy
couraged to write about or express theIacuter emotions as opposed to providshy
ing factual accounts of their upheavals (Pennebaker 1989) The
disdosure-health link then is c10sely tied into our understanding of emoshy
tions and their biological concomitants
A traditional debate within psychology and psychosomatics has surshy
rounded the definition of emotion Is it more important for example to
consider emotion as a subjective experience or as its expressive or biologshy
ical manifestations As the contributors to this volume indicate this overshy
looks the fact that all components of an emotional experience may have
important hea1th correlates Salovey and his colleagues (in chapter 7 of
this volume) make a compelling case that the subjective ways by which we
perceive and cope with our emotions can influence health and social beshy
haviors Traue (chapter 8 this volume) drawing on the rich and someshy
times controversial assumptions of Harold G Wolff (eg Wolf amp Goodshy
ell 1968) and Wilhelm Reich (1949) provides impressive data that link
inhibited emotional expressiveness in various parts of the body to
headache and back pain In short both subjective experienced emotion
and the bases of emotional expressiveness are tied to health and illness
One reason that researchers in psychology have shied away from studyshy
ing emotion and its links to illness is that they have not known how to
deal with the concept of repression Clinical signs of emotional repression
and denial are observed quite frequently When a friend assures one that
he is happy and relaxed in the midst of an emotional upheaval and at the
same time his facial muscles are rigid and his speech is clipped and hosshy
tile one knows something is amiss A discipline that relies too heavily on
straightforward self-reports cannot by definition see or measure represshy
sion (d Shedler Mayman amp Manis 1993)
The repression or inhibition of emotion is central to an understandshy
ing of disclosure In theory individuals who attempt to confront traumatic
experiences without acknowledging emotions should not benefit and could
perhaps suffer from disclosure The work by Schwartz and Kline (chapter
9 this volume) indicates that individuals who are classified as repressive
6
copers are indeed h
brain wave and even ir ter 10 this volume) ex
but intuitively appeal
repression In their W4
that alexithymics maJ
logical problems Fina
ume) offer an import
function Their chapt4
psychologically relevru
CLINICA
Disclosure of ones dec
nomenon whether in
intimate topics with al
trust between the part
closes personal experie
on the relationship doser Ceel better it ca
1993b)
Within a dinical
emotions can provok(
apist Drawing on a ce volume) suggests that
therapist and dient al
To accomplish this th
emotions as well as to
joint emotional worlc
leagues (chapter 13 ti with clients emotions
help people learn to r
to positive states
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
Emotion Disclosure and Health An Overview James w Pennebaker
I n the psychological and medicalliteratures there is overwhelming evshy
idence that traumatic experiences provoke mental and physical health problems A central tenet of most psychotherapies is that talking about these experiences is beneficial Indeed meta-analyses of therapy outcomes
indicate that virtually all therapies-irrespective of their theoretical orientation-bring about improvements in both psychological and physshyical health An important nonspecific feature of therapy is that it allows
individuals to translate their experiences into words The disclosure process itself then may be as important as any feedback the client receives from the therapist
Until the mid-1980s the scant psychological research on disclosure focused on interpersonal relationships (Jourard 1971) the role of conshyfession in healing (Frank 1961) the broad value of social support (Cobb
1976) and disclosure within the therapeutic relationship especially as it related to transference (Freud 19201966 Rogers 1951) Occasional studshy
The preparation oC this chapter was made possible in part by a grant from the National Science Founshydation SBR9411674
3
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
ies in anthropology reported that medical healing ceremonies in Native
American African and andent Asian sodeties typically involved sorne
form of confession or diselosure of secrets by the person who was to be
healed (see Georges chapter 2)
For the past S to 8 years a growing nurnber of researchers frorn sevshy
eral disciplines have begun investigating why talking or writing about emoshy
tional upheavals can influence mental and physical health For example
investigators have now found that writing about traumatic experiences
produces improvements in immune function drops in physician visits for
illness and better performance at school and work (eg Esterling Antoni
Fletcher Margulies amp Schneiderman 1994 Pennebaker 1993a Spera
Buhrfeind amp Pennebaker 1994) Similarly other studies indicate that the
failure to talk or acknowledge significant experiences is associated with inshy
creased health problems autonomic activity and ruminations (eg Rimeacute
Mesquita Philippot amp Boca 1991 Wegner 1994) Yet other investigations
frorn the cognitive and eliacutenical realms are now finding that traumatic exshy
periences affect basic cognitive and memory processes (Freyd 1993) and
the abilities to construct coherent narratives (Mahoney 1991)
The increasingly elear links among traumatic experiences emotional
expression cognitive processes and language have been difficult to study
beca use they cross several areas of expertise within psychology The purshy
pose of this book is to briacuteng together a diverse group of thinkers to
address sorne of the central features of the disclosure--health relationship
As suggested by the organization of the book three of these features inshy
elude the cognitive emotional and social dimensions of disc1osure
COGNITIVE PROCESSING IN INHIBITING
AND DISCLOSING
When upheavals occur in our lives we think differently Cornrnon sympshy
torns of thought disruptions incIude rurninating and worrying Why do
these cognitive changes occUr One argurnent that has roots in Freuds
drearn analyses as well as in the Gestalt views of perception is that indishy
viduals are psychologically atternpting to reach elosure or in sorne way
4
resolve the upheaval
1993) Recent worko
The reason that we I
to ruminate about ti mere act of thought
titillating secrets-m
dislodge from our
examining technique~
minating Borkovec
citing evidence to sug
of the same coin Wh closure about the pas
If taIking about tl work One idea is tlJa of structure 10 the exp able to organize strucl
periences and the ever
ses of client disc10sure
urne) proposes that tal First taIking both ref]
over time gradually p1
estingly Bucci (chapte
Coming frorn a psych(
chotherapeutic discou
to the creation of a m
When individuals WI
logical changes OCCUI
talking about trauma
rnuscle tension and s
elosure These biolog
I
~s in Native
olved sorne
o was to be
s from sevshy
aboutemoshy
or example
experiences
an visits for
iacuteng Antoni
193a Spera
ate that the
tedwithinshy
(eg Rimeacute
vestigations
aumatic exshy
11993) and
)
~ emotional
ult to study
iexcly The purshy
kers to
elationship
features inshy
losure
ING
mon sympshy
ng Why do in Freuds
is that indishy
l sorne way
AN OVERVIEW
~
resolve the upheaval (cf Horowitz 1976 Martin Tesser amp McIntosh
1993) Recent work on thought suppression provides another perspective
The reason that we ruminate about events is because we are trying not
to ruminate about them (Wegner amp Lane chapter 3 this volume) The
mere act of thought suppression- whether about distressing traumas or
titillating secrets-makes the thoughts more accessible and difficult to
dislodge from our minds Several ongoing cliacutenical investigations are
examining techniques that may reduce peoples levels of worrying and rushy
minating Borkovec and colleagues (chapter 4 this volume) provide exshy
citing evidence to suggest that disclosure and worry may be opposite sides
of the same coin Whereas future-oriented worry may disrupt health disshy
closure about the past may reduce worrying and improve health
If talking about the past reduces ruminations and worries how does it
work One idea is that translating experiences into words forces sorne kind
of structure to the experiences themselves Through language individuals are
able to organize structure and ultimately assimilate both their emotional exshy
periences and the events that may have provoked the emotions In his analyshy
ses ofcliacuteent disclosure within a therapeutic setting Stiles (chapter 5 this volshy
ume) proposes that talking about an event accomplishes two important goals
First talking both retlects and reduces anxiety Second repeated disclosure
over time gradually promotes the assimilation of the upsetting event Intershy
estingly Bucci (chapter 6 this volume) offers a complementary explanation
Coming from a psychoanalytic perspective she suggests that an effective psyshy
chotherapeutic discourse progresses from a concrete description of an event
to the creation of a more abstract narrative of it
EMOTIONS EXPRESSIVENESS AND
PSYCHOSOMATICS
When individuals write or talk about emotional events important bioshy
logical changes occur During confession in the laboratory for example
taIking about traumas brings about striking reductions in blood pressure
muscle tension and skin conductance during or immediately after the disshy
closure These biological effects are most apparent among participants who
5
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
express emotion Indeed other laboratory studies indicate that long-term
health benefits of disdosure are only apparent if individuals are enshy
couraged to write about or express theIacuter emotions as opposed to providshy
ing factual accounts of their upheavals (Pennebaker 1989) The
disdosure-health link then is c10sely tied into our understanding of emoshy
tions and their biological concomitants
A traditional debate within psychology and psychosomatics has surshy
rounded the definition of emotion Is it more important for example to
consider emotion as a subjective experience or as its expressive or biologshy
ical manifestations As the contributors to this volume indicate this overshy
looks the fact that all components of an emotional experience may have
important hea1th correlates Salovey and his colleagues (in chapter 7 of
this volume) make a compelling case that the subjective ways by which we
perceive and cope with our emotions can influence health and social beshy
haviors Traue (chapter 8 this volume) drawing on the rich and someshy
times controversial assumptions of Harold G Wolff (eg Wolf amp Goodshy
ell 1968) and Wilhelm Reich (1949) provides impressive data that link
inhibited emotional expressiveness in various parts of the body to
headache and back pain In short both subjective experienced emotion
and the bases of emotional expressiveness are tied to health and illness
One reason that researchers in psychology have shied away from studyshy
ing emotion and its links to illness is that they have not known how to
deal with the concept of repression Clinical signs of emotional repression
and denial are observed quite frequently When a friend assures one that
he is happy and relaxed in the midst of an emotional upheaval and at the
same time his facial muscles are rigid and his speech is clipped and hosshy
tile one knows something is amiss A discipline that relies too heavily on
straightforward self-reports cannot by definition see or measure represshy
sion (d Shedler Mayman amp Manis 1993)
The repression or inhibition of emotion is central to an understandshy
ing of disclosure In theory individuals who attempt to confront traumatic
experiences without acknowledging emotions should not benefit and could
perhaps suffer from disclosure The work by Schwartz and Kline (chapter
9 this volume) indicates that individuals who are classified as repressive
6
copers are indeed h
brain wave and even ir ter 10 this volume) ex
but intuitively appeal
repression In their W4
that alexithymics maJ
logical problems Fina
ume) offer an import
function Their chapt4
psychologically relevru
CLINICA
Disclosure of ones dec
nomenon whether in
intimate topics with al
trust between the part
closes personal experie
on the relationship doser Ceel better it ca
1993b)
Within a dinical
emotions can provok(
apist Drawing on a ce volume) suggests that
therapist and dient al
To accomplish this th
emotions as well as to
joint emotional worlc
leagues (chapter 13 ti with clients emotions
help people learn to r
to positive states
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
ies in anthropology reported that medical healing ceremonies in Native
American African and andent Asian sodeties typically involved sorne
form of confession or diselosure of secrets by the person who was to be
healed (see Georges chapter 2)
For the past S to 8 years a growing nurnber of researchers frorn sevshy
eral disciplines have begun investigating why talking or writing about emoshy
tional upheavals can influence mental and physical health For example
investigators have now found that writing about traumatic experiences
produces improvements in immune function drops in physician visits for
illness and better performance at school and work (eg Esterling Antoni
Fletcher Margulies amp Schneiderman 1994 Pennebaker 1993a Spera
Buhrfeind amp Pennebaker 1994) Similarly other studies indicate that the
failure to talk or acknowledge significant experiences is associated with inshy
creased health problems autonomic activity and ruminations (eg Rimeacute
Mesquita Philippot amp Boca 1991 Wegner 1994) Yet other investigations
frorn the cognitive and eliacutenical realms are now finding that traumatic exshy
periences affect basic cognitive and memory processes (Freyd 1993) and
the abilities to construct coherent narratives (Mahoney 1991)
The increasingly elear links among traumatic experiences emotional
expression cognitive processes and language have been difficult to study
beca use they cross several areas of expertise within psychology The purshy
pose of this book is to briacuteng together a diverse group of thinkers to
address sorne of the central features of the disclosure--health relationship
As suggested by the organization of the book three of these features inshy
elude the cognitive emotional and social dimensions of disc1osure
COGNITIVE PROCESSING IN INHIBITING
AND DISCLOSING
When upheavals occur in our lives we think differently Cornrnon sympshy
torns of thought disruptions incIude rurninating and worrying Why do
these cognitive changes occUr One argurnent that has roots in Freuds
drearn analyses as well as in the Gestalt views of perception is that indishy
viduals are psychologically atternpting to reach elosure or in sorne way
4
resolve the upheaval
1993) Recent worko
The reason that we I
to ruminate about ti mere act of thought
titillating secrets-m
dislodge from our
examining technique~
minating Borkovec
citing evidence to sug
of the same coin Wh closure about the pas
If taIking about tl work One idea is tlJa of structure 10 the exp able to organize strucl
periences and the ever
ses of client disc10sure
urne) proposes that tal First taIking both ref]
over time gradually p1
estingly Bucci (chapte
Coming frorn a psych(
chotherapeutic discou
to the creation of a m
When individuals WI
logical changes OCCUI
talking about trauma
rnuscle tension and s
elosure These biolog
I
~s in Native
olved sorne
o was to be
s from sevshy
aboutemoshy
or example
experiences
an visits for
iacuteng Antoni
193a Spera
ate that the
tedwithinshy
(eg Rimeacute
vestigations
aumatic exshy
11993) and
)
~ emotional
ult to study
iexcly The purshy
kers to
elationship
features inshy
losure
ING
mon sympshy
ng Why do in Freuds
is that indishy
l sorne way
AN OVERVIEW
~
resolve the upheaval (cf Horowitz 1976 Martin Tesser amp McIntosh
1993) Recent work on thought suppression provides another perspective
The reason that we ruminate about events is because we are trying not
to ruminate about them (Wegner amp Lane chapter 3 this volume) The
mere act of thought suppression- whether about distressing traumas or
titillating secrets-makes the thoughts more accessible and difficult to
dislodge from our minds Several ongoing cliacutenical investigations are
examining techniques that may reduce peoples levels of worrying and rushy
minating Borkovec and colleagues (chapter 4 this volume) provide exshy
citing evidence to suggest that disclosure and worry may be opposite sides
of the same coin Whereas future-oriented worry may disrupt health disshy
closure about the past may reduce worrying and improve health
If talking about the past reduces ruminations and worries how does it
work One idea is that translating experiences into words forces sorne kind
of structure to the experiences themselves Through language individuals are
able to organize structure and ultimately assimilate both their emotional exshy
periences and the events that may have provoked the emotions In his analyshy
ses ofcliacuteent disclosure within a therapeutic setting Stiles (chapter 5 this volshy
ume) proposes that talking about an event accomplishes two important goals
First talking both retlects and reduces anxiety Second repeated disclosure
over time gradually promotes the assimilation of the upsetting event Intershy
estingly Bucci (chapter 6 this volume) offers a complementary explanation
Coming from a psychoanalytic perspective she suggests that an effective psyshy
chotherapeutic discourse progresses from a concrete description of an event
to the creation of a more abstract narrative of it
EMOTIONS EXPRESSIVENESS AND
PSYCHOSOMATICS
When individuals write or talk about emotional events important bioshy
logical changes occur During confession in the laboratory for example
taIking about traumas brings about striking reductions in blood pressure
muscle tension and skin conductance during or immediately after the disshy
closure These biological effects are most apparent among participants who
5
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
express emotion Indeed other laboratory studies indicate that long-term
health benefits of disdosure are only apparent if individuals are enshy
couraged to write about or express theIacuter emotions as opposed to providshy
ing factual accounts of their upheavals (Pennebaker 1989) The
disdosure-health link then is c10sely tied into our understanding of emoshy
tions and their biological concomitants
A traditional debate within psychology and psychosomatics has surshy
rounded the definition of emotion Is it more important for example to
consider emotion as a subjective experience or as its expressive or biologshy
ical manifestations As the contributors to this volume indicate this overshy
looks the fact that all components of an emotional experience may have
important hea1th correlates Salovey and his colleagues (in chapter 7 of
this volume) make a compelling case that the subjective ways by which we
perceive and cope with our emotions can influence health and social beshy
haviors Traue (chapter 8 this volume) drawing on the rich and someshy
times controversial assumptions of Harold G Wolff (eg Wolf amp Goodshy
ell 1968) and Wilhelm Reich (1949) provides impressive data that link
inhibited emotional expressiveness in various parts of the body to
headache and back pain In short both subjective experienced emotion
and the bases of emotional expressiveness are tied to health and illness
One reason that researchers in psychology have shied away from studyshy
ing emotion and its links to illness is that they have not known how to
deal with the concept of repression Clinical signs of emotional repression
and denial are observed quite frequently When a friend assures one that
he is happy and relaxed in the midst of an emotional upheaval and at the
same time his facial muscles are rigid and his speech is clipped and hosshy
tile one knows something is amiss A discipline that relies too heavily on
straightforward self-reports cannot by definition see or measure represshy
sion (d Shedler Mayman amp Manis 1993)
The repression or inhibition of emotion is central to an understandshy
ing of disclosure In theory individuals who attempt to confront traumatic
experiences without acknowledging emotions should not benefit and could
perhaps suffer from disclosure The work by Schwartz and Kline (chapter
9 this volume) indicates that individuals who are classified as repressive
6
copers are indeed h
brain wave and even ir ter 10 this volume) ex
but intuitively appeal
repression In their W4
that alexithymics maJ
logical problems Fina
ume) offer an import
function Their chapt4
psychologically relevru
CLINICA
Disclosure of ones dec
nomenon whether in
intimate topics with al
trust between the part
closes personal experie
on the relationship doser Ceel better it ca
1993b)
Within a dinical
emotions can provok(
apist Drawing on a ce volume) suggests that
therapist and dient al
To accomplish this th
emotions as well as to
joint emotional worlc
leagues (chapter 13 ti with clients emotions
help people learn to r
to positive states
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
~s in Native
olved sorne
o was to be
s from sevshy
aboutemoshy
or example
experiences
an visits for
iacuteng Antoni
193a Spera
ate that the
tedwithinshy
(eg Rimeacute
vestigations
aumatic exshy
11993) and
)
~ emotional
ult to study
iexcly The purshy
kers to
elationship
features inshy
losure
ING
mon sympshy
ng Why do in Freuds
is that indishy
l sorne way
AN OVERVIEW
~
resolve the upheaval (cf Horowitz 1976 Martin Tesser amp McIntosh
1993) Recent work on thought suppression provides another perspective
The reason that we ruminate about events is because we are trying not
to ruminate about them (Wegner amp Lane chapter 3 this volume) The
mere act of thought suppression- whether about distressing traumas or
titillating secrets-makes the thoughts more accessible and difficult to
dislodge from our minds Several ongoing cliacutenical investigations are
examining techniques that may reduce peoples levels of worrying and rushy
minating Borkovec and colleagues (chapter 4 this volume) provide exshy
citing evidence to suggest that disclosure and worry may be opposite sides
of the same coin Whereas future-oriented worry may disrupt health disshy
closure about the past may reduce worrying and improve health
If talking about the past reduces ruminations and worries how does it
work One idea is that translating experiences into words forces sorne kind
of structure to the experiences themselves Through language individuals are
able to organize structure and ultimately assimilate both their emotional exshy
periences and the events that may have provoked the emotions In his analyshy
ses ofcliacuteent disclosure within a therapeutic setting Stiles (chapter 5 this volshy
ume) proposes that talking about an event accomplishes two important goals
First talking both retlects and reduces anxiety Second repeated disclosure
over time gradually promotes the assimilation of the upsetting event Intershy
estingly Bucci (chapter 6 this volume) offers a complementary explanation
Coming from a psychoanalytic perspective she suggests that an effective psyshy
chotherapeutic discourse progresses from a concrete description of an event
to the creation of a more abstract narrative of it
EMOTIONS EXPRESSIVENESS AND
PSYCHOSOMATICS
When individuals write or talk about emotional events important bioshy
logical changes occur During confession in the laboratory for example
taIking about traumas brings about striking reductions in blood pressure
muscle tension and skin conductance during or immediately after the disshy
closure These biological effects are most apparent among participants who
5
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
express emotion Indeed other laboratory studies indicate that long-term
health benefits of disdosure are only apparent if individuals are enshy
couraged to write about or express theIacuter emotions as opposed to providshy
ing factual accounts of their upheavals (Pennebaker 1989) The
disdosure-health link then is c10sely tied into our understanding of emoshy
tions and their biological concomitants
A traditional debate within psychology and psychosomatics has surshy
rounded the definition of emotion Is it more important for example to
consider emotion as a subjective experience or as its expressive or biologshy
ical manifestations As the contributors to this volume indicate this overshy
looks the fact that all components of an emotional experience may have
important hea1th correlates Salovey and his colleagues (in chapter 7 of
this volume) make a compelling case that the subjective ways by which we
perceive and cope with our emotions can influence health and social beshy
haviors Traue (chapter 8 this volume) drawing on the rich and someshy
times controversial assumptions of Harold G Wolff (eg Wolf amp Goodshy
ell 1968) and Wilhelm Reich (1949) provides impressive data that link
inhibited emotional expressiveness in various parts of the body to
headache and back pain In short both subjective experienced emotion
and the bases of emotional expressiveness are tied to health and illness
One reason that researchers in psychology have shied away from studyshy
ing emotion and its links to illness is that they have not known how to
deal with the concept of repression Clinical signs of emotional repression
and denial are observed quite frequently When a friend assures one that
he is happy and relaxed in the midst of an emotional upheaval and at the
same time his facial muscles are rigid and his speech is clipped and hosshy
tile one knows something is amiss A discipline that relies too heavily on
straightforward self-reports cannot by definition see or measure represshy
sion (d Shedler Mayman amp Manis 1993)
The repression or inhibition of emotion is central to an understandshy
ing of disclosure In theory individuals who attempt to confront traumatic
experiences without acknowledging emotions should not benefit and could
perhaps suffer from disclosure The work by Schwartz and Kline (chapter
9 this volume) indicates that individuals who are classified as repressive
6
copers are indeed h
brain wave and even ir ter 10 this volume) ex
but intuitively appeal
repression In their W4
that alexithymics maJ
logical problems Fina
ume) offer an import
function Their chapt4
psychologically relevru
CLINICA
Disclosure of ones dec
nomenon whether in
intimate topics with al
trust between the part
closes personal experie
on the relationship doser Ceel better it ca
1993b)
Within a dinical
emotions can provok(
apist Drawing on a ce volume) suggests that
therapist and dient al
To accomplish this th
emotions as well as to
joint emotional worlc
leagues (chapter 13 ti with clients emotions
help people learn to r
to positive states
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
express emotion Indeed other laboratory studies indicate that long-term
health benefits of disdosure are only apparent if individuals are enshy
couraged to write about or express theIacuter emotions as opposed to providshy
ing factual accounts of their upheavals (Pennebaker 1989) The
disdosure-health link then is c10sely tied into our understanding of emoshy
tions and their biological concomitants
A traditional debate within psychology and psychosomatics has surshy
rounded the definition of emotion Is it more important for example to
consider emotion as a subjective experience or as its expressive or biologshy
ical manifestations As the contributors to this volume indicate this overshy
looks the fact that all components of an emotional experience may have
important hea1th correlates Salovey and his colleagues (in chapter 7 of
this volume) make a compelling case that the subjective ways by which we
perceive and cope with our emotions can influence health and social beshy
haviors Traue (chapter 8 this volume) drawing on the rich and someshy
times controversial assumptions of Harold G Wolff (eg Wolf amp Goodshy
ell 1968) and Wilhelm Reich (1949) provides impressive data that link
inhibited emotional expressiveness in various parts of the body to
headache and back pain In short both subjective experienced emotion
and the bases of emotional expressiveness are tied to health and illness
One reason that researchers in psychology have shied away from studyshy
ing emotion and its links to illness is that they have not known how to
deal with the concept of repression Clinical signs of emotional repression
and denial are observed quite frequently When a friend assures one that
he is happy and relaxed in the midst of an emotional upheaval and at the
same time his facial muscles are rigid and his speech is clipped and hosshy
tile one knows something is amiss A discipline that relies too heavily on
straightforward self-reports cannot by definition see or measure represshy
sion (d Shedler Mayman amp Manis 1993)
The repression or inhibition of emotion is central to an understandshy
ing of disclosure In theory individuals who attempt to confront traumatic
experiences without acknowledging emotions should not benefit and could
perhaps suffer from disclosure The work by Schwartz and Kline (chapter
9 this volume) indicates that individuals who are classified as repressive
6
copers are indeed h
brain wave and even ir ter 10 this volume) ex
but intuitively appeal
repression In their W4
that alexithymics maJ
logical problems Fina
ume) offer an import
function Their chapt4
psychologically relevru
CLINICA
Disclosure of ones dec
nomenon whether in
intimate topics with al
trust between the part
closes personal experie
on the relationship doser Ceel better it ca
1993b)
Within a dinical
emotions can provok(
apist Drawing on a ce volume) suggests that
therapist and dient al
To accomplish this th
emotions as well as to
joint emotional worlc
leagues (chapter 13 ti with clients emotions
help people learn to r
to positive states
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
tlong-term
a1s are enshy
1to providshy
(989) The
ingofemoshy
ics has surshy
example to
e or biologshy
te this overshy
ce maybave
hapter 7 of
bywhich we
id social beshy
1 and someshy
olf amp Goodshy
ata that link he body to
ed emotion md illness
from studyshy
own how to
al repression
res one tbat
uand at the ed and hosshy
o heavily on
lSure represshy
understandshy
nt traumatic
5t and could
line (chapter
as repressive
AN OVERVIEW
copers are indeed hyperresponsive to emotional stimuli as measured by
brain wave and even immune system activity Paez and his colleagues (chapshy
ter 10 this volume) extend this thinking by focusing on the often-maligned
but intuitively appealing concept of alexithymia-a conceptual cousin of
repression In their work with cancer patients the authors are discovering
that alexithymics may be at greater risk for both psychological and bioshy
logical problems Finally Petrie Booth and Davison (chapter ll this volshy
ume) offer an important overview of repression disclosure and immune
function Their chapter describes how and why the immune system taps
psychologically relevant dimensions associated with emotions
CLINICAL AND SOCIAL DIMENSIONS
OF DISCLOSURE
Disclosure of ones deepest thoughts and feelings is a powerful social pheshy
nomenon whether in a therapeutic setting or in daily life Talking about
intimate topics with another person typically assumes a particular level of
trust between the participants Furthermore the degree to which one disshy
closes personal experiences may have profound positive or negative effects
on the relationship Whereas talkjng about a trauma may make the disshy
closer feel better it can make the listener feel worse (Pennebaker 1990
1993b)
Within a clinical setting the clients disclosure of powerful negative
emotions can provoke meaningful thoughts and images within the thershy
apist Drawing on a constructivist perspective Mahoney (chapter 12 this
volume) suggests that the most effective therapy occurs when both the
therapist and client are able to build on their shared emotions together
To accomplish this the therapist must be attuned to both his or her own
emotions as well as to those of the client Whereas Mahoney examines the
joint emotional world of the therapist and client Domiacutenguez and colshy
leagues (chapter 13 this volume) take a very different strategy in dealing
with clients emotions They believe that the ultimate goal of therapy is to
help people learn to reverse their emotions quickly going from negative
to positive states
7
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
Moving beyond the laboratory and clinic Rimeacute and Wellenkamp
(chapters 14 amp 15 of this volume respectively) address the nature of the
social sharing and disclosure of emotions among people in the real world
on a daily basis In an intriguing series of studies Rimeacute demonstrates that
an overwhelming majority of people share most of their emotional expeshy
riences with others This natural tendency however is most likely to be
blocked for the emotions of shame In addition he finds that social sharshy
ing is powerful in reducing anxiety and psychological distress with a varishy
ety of populations Wellenkamp an anthropologist supports many of these
observations on the basis of her field work with the Toraja culture from
the remote regions of Indonesia Wellenkamp like Georges (chapter 2)
helps to put disclosure iexclnto the broader cultural perspective That is many
but not all cultures look favorably on the sharing of emotions In addition
the types of emotions and the modes of expression vary considerably
SUMMARY
The links among emotion disdosure and health exist at multiple levels
of analysis Within Western culture the disdosure of traumatic and emoshy
tional experiences can promote physical and psychological health The unshyderlying mechanisms for this phenomenon are cognitive emotional bioshy
logical and social Each of these systems of understanding are intimately
interrelated Shakespeares King Lear Rostands Cyrano de Bergerac the
Truly Guilty person in any of Erle Stanley Gardners Perry Mason books
or even the wolf in Litde Red Riding Hood all change once they reveal
their true identities Their thoughts behaviors probable physiology and
relationships to others are immediately transformed-usually but not alshyways for the best Once the disclosure is made however the person (or
wolf) becomes an internally consistent creature wherein all features of
mind and body become synchronous
REFERENCES
Cobb S (1976) Social support as a moderator of Jife stress Psychosomatic Medishy
cine 38 300-313
8
Esterling B A Anto
Emotiacuteonal discl
Barr virus reac
130-140
Frank J D (1961)1
Freud S (1966) 1m
York W W NO
Freyd J J (1993) T
bate Center fur
ference Ann Arl
Horowitz M (1976)
JourardSM(1971)
New York WUe)
Mahoney M J (199
chotherapy New
Martiacuten 1 L Tesser J
fects of unattain
Pennebaker (Eds
NJ Prentice Hal
Pennebaker J W (19
Advances in expl
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (19
York William M
Pennebaker J W (1~
peutic implicati(
Pennebaker J W (1~
J W PennebakeI
Cliffs NJ Prenti
Reich W (1949) eh Rimeacute B Mesquita E
Six studies on th
Rogers C R (1951)
theory Boston 1
Shedler J Mayman
iexclcan Psychologist
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
id Wellenkamp le nature of the n the real world monstrates that IDotional expeshy10st likely to be that social sharshyress with a varishy15 many of these aja culture from ges (chapter 2) re That is many ons In addition onsiderably
t multiple levels unatic and emoshy1health The unshy emotional bioshy19 are intimately de Bergerac the ry Mason books once they reveal physiology and uaUy but not alshyr the person (or in aU features of
sychosomatic Medi-
AN OVERV1EW
Esterling B A Antoni M Fletcher M Margulies S amp Schneiderman N (1994)
Emotional disclosure through writing or speaking modulates latent Epsteinshy
Barr virus reactivation lournal of Consulting and Cliacutenical Psychology 62
130-140
Frank J D (1961) Persuasion and healing Baltimore Johns Hopkins Press
Freud S (1966) Introductory lectures in psychoanalysis (J Strachey Trans) New
York W W Norton amp Co (Original work published 1920)
Freyd J J (1993) Theoretical and personal perspectives on the delayed memory deshy
bate Center for Mental Health at Foote Hospitals Continuing Educatiacuteon Conshy
ference Ann Arbor MI
Horowitz M (1976) Stress response syndromes Northvale NJ Jason Aronson
Jourard S M (1971) Self-disclosure An experimental analysis of the transparent self
New York Wiley-Intersciacuteence
Mahoney M J (1991) Human change processes The scientific foundations of psyshy
chotherapy New York Basic Books
Martiacuten L L Tesser A amp McIntosh W D (1993) Wanting but not having The efshy
fects of unattained goals on thoughts and feelings In D M Wegner and J W
Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 552-572) Englewood Cliffs
NJ Prentice Hall
Pennebaker J W (1989) Confession inhibition and disease In L Berkowitz (Ed)
Advances in experimental social psychology Vol 22 (pp 211-244) New York
Academic Press
Pennebaker J W (1990) Opening up The healiacuteng power ofconfiding in others New
York William Morrow
Pennebaker J W (I993a) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therashy
peutic implicatiacuteons Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
Pennebaker J W (1993b) Mechanisms of social constraint In D M Wegner amp
J W Pennebaker (Eds) Handbook ofmental control (pp 200-219) Englewood
Cliffs NJ Prentice Hall
Reich W (1949) Character analysis (3rd ed) New York Orgone Institute Press
Rimeacute B Mesquita B Philippot P amp Boca S (1991) Beyond the emotional event
Six studies on the social sharing of emotion Cognition amp Emotion 5 435-465
Rogers C R (1951) Client-centered therapy Its current practice implications and
theory Boston Houghton Mifflin
Shedler J Mayman M amp Manis M (1993) The illusion of mental health Amershy
ican Psychologist 48 1117-1131
9
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
I
JAMES W PENNEBAKER
SperaS P Buhrfeind E Dbull amp Pennebaker J W (1994) Expressivewritingand copshy
ing with job 10ss Academy ofManagement Journal 37 722-733
Wegner D M (1994) Ironie processes of mental control Psychological Review 101
34-52
Wolf S amp Goodell H (1968) Harold G Wolffs stress and disease (2nd ed) Springshy
field IL Charles C Thomas
A Cul Persp(
T he disdosure of an entrenched al
culturally as weU COI
ray ofsocieties Howe actively discouragedshythoughts and feelings
In a number of e strated the health ben eg Pennebaker 1993 efits such as reduced function Pennebaker practice of disdosure as highly meaningful ~
meanings attached to fect healing as weU as tain health In additio as-therapy in the West in a brief and prograrn
10
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
bull The Roles of Disclosure and Emotional Reversal
in Clinical Practice Benjamiacuten Domiacutenguez Pablo Valderrama
Mariacutea de los Angeles Meza Sara Lidia Peacuterez Amparo Silva Gloria Martiacutenez Victor Manuel Meacutendez
and Yolanda Olvera
L ove pleasure and pain play central roles in human experience Deshy
spite the importance of emotions in everyday life scientific efforts to
try to understand them and their links to the mind and brain have proved
troublesome Particularly problematic from a clinical perspective are creshy
atiacuteng and instituting ways of controlling emotions (especially negative
ones) in clients and even in psychologists The present chapter examines
two overlapping cliacutenical issues in helping iacutendividuals to manage stress and
emotions among adults in Mexico City The first focuses on therole of
written disclosure on the control ofbiological and subjective stress A secshy
ond strategy considers the role of disclosure as a technique to bring about
emotional reversaL As we discuss processes related to disclosure and emoshy
tional reversal may not conform to traditional notions of stress and linshy
ear causal relations
If we are to understand the effects of emotional stress on human beshy
havior we need to be able to distinguish between an emotional and a nonshy
emotional state Unfortunately apure physiological defrnition of emotion
of stress is limited Selye (1983) defines stress as the result of any demand
255
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
on the body using objective indicators such as bodily and chemical
changes that appear after any demando The perception and interaction of
such arousal iacutes an important psychological issue It is the perceived expeshy
rience of an emotional change that determines its effect on other mental
processes such as attention and short-term memory (Horgan 1994)1t iacutes
the perception of arousal as well as the preoccupation with probable stresshy
sors that interferes with continuous conscious processing (Mandler 1993)
Current theories view emotions as consisting of an interaction of a
cognitive evaluative schema with visceral arousal In this context evaluashy
tive cognitions provide the qualitative component of an emotional expeshy
rience and visceral activity provides its intensity and peculiar emotional
characteristics Sorne strokes for example may cause peculiar conditions
known as prosopagnosia in which the patient is unable to recognize faces
even those as familiar as a spouses or childs Even though the patient is
unable to recognize them looking at the face of someone emotionally close
will increase the heartbeat rateo Thus the visual stimulus can evoke an
emotional response even if the verbal association is lost (Klivington 1989)
Observations such as these have led to the idea that visceral arousal is necshy
essary for emotional experience but that the nature of emotional experishy
ence will depend on an individuals thoughts memories and current
circumstances Accordiacuteng to this view individuals will evaluate any expeshy
rience as a positive or negative emotion depending on what they expect
of it their social context and whether they feel in control of a situation
Most relevant to the present discussion is the emotional state of stress
Historically people have believed that stress-relevant psychological factors
affect disease susceptibility and course (see Georges chapter 2 this volshy
ume) A number of recent studies have shown that various stressors can
adversely affect immune function and that sorne psychological intervenshy
tions may reduce stress thereby improving immune function (eg Kiecoltshy
Glaser amp Glaser 1992) An important current task is the development of
effective psychological interventions for immune-related illness that iacutes
linked to out of control emotional states The controlled intervention
design in which potentiaUy valuable applications of psychoimmunologic
research are tested represents a scientifically superior method for revealshy
256
THE RO
ing causal
physiologi
Lazarus (1
depends 01
vironment
fuI situatio
cause-effe(
natural di
iacuteng comple
possible
Clinica
dients beh
chosocial s1
chronicpai
Given the (
thetreatm~
have emph
the develo]
causal anal
ments
With r
emotional of causal v
single psycl
the impact
sequently i
biofeedbac
clients dial Most (
sumethat 1
between th
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
and chemical
interaction of
lerceived expeshy
1 other mental
iexclan 1994) It is
probable stresshy
1andler 1993)
lteraction of a
ontext evaluashy
notional expeshy
lar emotional
~iar conditions
recognize faces
nthe patient is
10tionally close can evoke an
vington1989)
l arousal is necshy
totional experishy
~S and current
luate any expeshy
lat they expect
of a situation
~ state of stress
ological factors
lter 2 this volshy
18 stressors can
19ical intervenshy
n ( eg Kiecoltshy
levelopment of
illness that is
rl intervention
oimmunologic
hod fur revealshy
ing causal or perhaps nonlinear relationships between psychosodal and
physiological processes
MOVING BEYOND SIMPLE CAUSAL MODELS
Lazarus (1993) argued that stress is an inevitably undean variable that
depends on a dynamic and changing interaction between person and enshy
vironment He also noted that it is possible to break down a complex stressshy
fuI situation into interdependent variables-in other words within linear
cause-effect approaches-especially when it comes to studying people in
natural clinical and everyday situations From our view however reducshy
ing complex relationships into simple causal components is probably not
possible
Cliacutenical interventions often try to modify the presumed causes of a
clients behavior or emotional problems For example responses to psyshy
chosodal stressors are often the focus of treatment programs for different
chronic pain populations (Domiacutenguez Valderrama Peacuterez amp Meza 1994)
Given the central role played in this clinical context of causal variables in
the treatment programs many authors (Haynes Huland amp Oliveira 1993)
have emphasized that an empirically based causal analysis is important to
the development of effective treatment programs for clients Errors in
causal analysis of any given problem are also likely to lead to poor treatshy
ments
With most clients and patients the identification and diagnosis of
emotional problems is necessary but not suffident for the identification
of causal variables That is beca use there can be many possible causes for
single psychological stress problems as well as differences across clients in
the impact of various causes of the same emotional state problem Conshy
sequently it is usually not possible to select among social skills cognitive
biofeedback or pharmacological interventions just on the basis of the
dients diagnosis of for example posttraumatic stress disorder
Most of the current methods for detecting causal relationships preshy
sume that the relationships are linear (Le the strength of the relationship
between the variables is equal across their values) An accumulating body
257
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
of research suggests however that the causal relationship often demonshy
strates functional plateaus criticallevels varying causallatencies durashy
tion of effects and more complex nonlinear functional relationships
(Haynes et al 1993)
Causal relationships can change across time They are unstable and
dynamic There is strong empirical support for the hypothesis that the
causes of many distress-associated disorders such as chronic pain subshy
stance abuse or depression may change across time and developmental
periods (Haynes et al 1993) Consequently the relative strength of causal
variables can change across the course of effective treatments According
to Barton (1994) the general characteristics of self-organizations (a conshy
cept that denotes a process by which a structure or pattern emerges in an
open system without specifications from the outside environment) are
shared by chemical biological and psychological systems and include
among others (a) readiness to exhibit multiple stable states that change
suddenly from one to another if a parameter value crosses a critical threshshy
old (eg chronic pain patients who go from a suffering to a relaxation
state) (b) cyclical state changes (as the ones that happen within a
Monday-Friday cyele linked to work stress) (c) the structural coupling of
component processes (d) temporal spatial and behavioral organization
(eg patients relaxation skills that progress from muscular-response to
language mediated change) (e) localized instabilities that can lead to one
part of the system to organize itself differently from another part of the
system (eg the clinical finding of patients with relaxed peripheral temshy
perature index and stressed verbal reports) (f) the ability of one unit to
cause other units to oscillate at a harmonically related frequency (enshy
trainment) and (g) behaviors that could be modeled by a system of nonshy
linear equations (eg inverted-U functions as in the Yerkes-Dodson Law)
There are dinically relevant implications in considering transitions
from one to another emotional state as a causal variable First the degree
of change of a variable (or the degree of contrast between current and
previous magnitudes of the causal variable) is an important target of asshy
sessment (psychophysiological stress profile) Second the effects of intershy
258
THE ROL
vention mal
ficult to de
chophysiolo
(stress iropal
IDENTl A
In 1985 Me earthquake i1 becoroe psych
sors This soc
ogists profess
tive level appr
managers in g
nition of the i nance ofboth
mand for effe
dinical psych(
approaches s
symptom synlt
pression or in There Ola
shows no obv
sign of stress)
structive cont
stress Conver
terns of physi
emotional sigJ
junction amo
sponse Is it
alone define a
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
lemonshy vention may dissipate with time rendering this causal phenomenon difshy
durashy ficult to detecto Third patients and clients with equal values on psyshy
mships chophysiological measurements are not necessarily equal on that state
(stress impact or subjective pain)
)le and
hat the IDENTIFYING AND TREATING STRESS WITHIN n subshy
A CLINICAL CONTEXT RELAXATION Imental
AND DISCLOSUREf causal
ording In 1985 Mexico City experienced a devastating earthquake After the
(a conshy earthquake it soon became widely accepted that virtuaUy anyone could
S in an beco me psychologicaUy or physically affected by current or recaUed stresshy
nt) are sors This social reaction created the appropriate conditions for psycholshy
indude ogists professional intervention Within this context a primary prevenshy
change tive level approach to stress management was soon adopted by many top
threshshy managers in goverment In recent years there has beena growing recogshy
axation nition of the important role that stress plays in the etiology and mainteshy
ithin a nance of both psychological and somatic disorders Consequently the deshy
pling of mand for effective stress management programs has been increasing in
lization clinical psychology as well as in medicine Unlike many other treatment
onse to approaches stress management is not targeted toward any particular
110 one symptom syndrome or diagnostic category Stress or negative emotion exshy
t of the pression or inhibition may playa role in any disorder or illness
~al temshy There may be instances in which a subject reports feeling stressed but
unit to shows no obvious physiological sign of sympathetic arousal (the de facto
cy (enshy sign of stress) In such cases psychophysiological analyses offer little conshy
ofnonshy structive contribution to the understanding of the phenomenology of
n Law) stress Conversely there may be instances where a person shows dear patshy
lsitions terns of physiological reactivity to an eliciting stimulus but reports no
degree emotional signs of distress How should psychologists interpret such disshy
~nt and junction among behavior subjective experience and physiological reshy
t of asshy sponse Is it reasonable to assume that psychophysiological responses
f inter- alone define a stress response Or is the proper definition of stress in the
259
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
DOMiacuteNGUEZ ET AL
final analysis a phenomenological one Psychophysiological measureshy
ment as a subdiscipline of the broader interdisciplinary field of behavshy
ioral neuroscience is distinguished by its use of surface recordings of bioshy
electric activity rather than invasive procedures for the study of emotional
activity linked to biological changes
Among the many biological measures of stress we have tended to rely
on hand temperature Circulation in the hands and fingers is controlled
by the autonomic nervous system through sympathetic vasoconstricting
nerves as well as by circulating vaso active hormones 1t is generally asshy
sumed that feedback-iacutenduced vasodilation results from lowered sympashy
thetic activation (SuOOt Pilon amp Fenton 1978) Temperature feedback
studies employing brief training sessions (Keefe 1978) generally have
demonstrated significant vasodilation whereas those employing longer
sessiacuteons have failed to do so (Surwit 1977)
Disclosllre Within a Stress Management Setting
In 1992 we began a large scale stress management program llsing peshy
ripheral temperature as a biologiacutecal indicator of the effectiacuteveness of each
of several interventions The stress management program involved 174
male (468) and 198 female (532) adults ranging in age from 23 to
63 The sample was selected by management based on administrative crishy
teria outlined by the the Director of Training within a large governmenshy
tal office Workshops of 15 hours consisting of small groups of approxishy
mately 14 people were run for three to five consecutive sessions The
project had two main goals First we attempted to provide relaxation reshy
sponse training in order to help participants decrease or restructure their
dysfunctional coping style to job stressors Second we offered partiacutecipants
a ready to use technique based on self-disclosure through writing to modshy
erate or decrease active inhibition effects on cognitive and somatic meashy
sures of stress (Pennebaker 1993)
General results linked to the first goal were achiacuteeved with autogenic
relaxation training techniques Using skin temperature as the dependent
measure the autogenic training data were ultimately compared with a secshy
ond training technique which we caH Pennebakers exercises wherein
260
THE ROLE OF
participants wrote
compared in term
tween subjective e
In the writing I
secrets for four seiexcl perspectives were b
indicated that peop
ing secrets sessior
than those who ov
from conveying ve
over the 3-5 days e
On the 1st day
ing instructions (1
grammatical rules
write nonstop abo
told to write abou1
use of a high nuro
emotion words anlt
ural writing style (
pants repeated the
the 1st day (Traurr
were encouraged t
promote psycholof
Person condition)
As can be seer
the two Trauma
condition Interest
idence a significan
ter writing Particl
perature for the
autogeniacutec relaxati
temperature from
the two Trauma VI
over twice as mu(
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
l measureshy of behavshy
ngsofbioshyemotional
lded to reIy
controlled onstricting
nerally asshy
ed sympashy
e feedback
erally have
ing longer
ting
I using peshy
ess of each
volved 174
from 23 to iexcltrative crishy
overnmenshy
)f approxishy
osions The
axation reshy
lcture their larticipants
Ilgtomodshy
natic mea-
I autogenic
dependent with asecshys wherein
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
participants wrote about their stressors The physiological data were then
compared in terms of temporal shifts in temperature and correlation beshy
tween subjective emotional change and physiological changes
In the writing phase of the project participants wrote about their painful
secrets for four separate days different perspectives each day The different
perspectives were based on correlational findings by Pennebaker (1993) that
indicated that people who consistently use negative emotions in their writshy
ing secrets sessions subsequently evidence greater health improvements
than those who overuse positive emotions In addition those who move
from conveying very little to a high degree of insight and causal thinking
over the 3-5 days of writing also demonstrate health improvements
On the 1st day of writing subjects received the standard trauma writshy
ing instructions (Trauma Writing-I condition) Do not pay attention to
grammatical rules while writing use first person anonyrnity guaranteed
write nonstop about painful secrets On the 2nd day participants were
told to write about traumas using specific language rules induding the
use of a high number of negative emotion and low number of positive
emotion words and encouragement to use causal words within their natshy
ural writing style (Language Guided condition) On the 3rd day particishy
pants repeated the standard trauma writing that had been employed on the 1st day (Trauma Writing-I1 condition) Finally on day 4 participants
were encouraged to avoid using first person in their writing in ordeacuter to
pro mote psychological distancing from the original emotional state (Third
Person condition)
As can be seen in Figure 1 hand temperature increased markedly in
the two Trauma Writing conditions and decreased in the Third Person
condition Interestingly only the Language Guided condition failed to evshy
idence a significant increase in peripheral temperature from before to afshy
ter writing Particularly striking is the comparison ofchanges in hand temshy
perature for the various writing conditions with the results from the
autogenic relaxation training Overall the within -session increase of hand
temperature from before to after reIaxation was 070 C Averaging across the two Trauma Writing conditions hand temperature increased 15deg Cshyover twice as mucho
261
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ID Before After
33
335
325
32
315
31
305
30
Trauma1 Language TraumamiddotU 3rd Person
Figure 1
Changes in sItin temperature (in centigrade) from before to after writing as a function of condition TraumamiddotI and Trauma-U refer to indiviacuteduals writing about traumas Language refers to the language-guided condition 3rd Person rcfers to people writing about traumas from the third person perspective From Domiacutenguez et al (1994) based on data from 372 workers between 1992 and 1993
Analyzing the data on a ease-by-ease basis iacutet was possible to find a
general pattern of temperature temporal patterning as early as during the first trauma writing that served as a predictor of which subjeets would evshy
idenee emotional improvements and who would not Beginning the first
writing session dominant hand temperature started to inerease then at
the middle of session (when people report disclosure of negative emoshy
tions) temperature deereased signifieantly from the initial temperature
Although preliminary these observations suggest that we ean gaiacuten tremenshy
dous insight by looking at specifie fluetuations in temperature on a
minute-by-minute basis 4
In summary autogenic training and disclosure through writing are
both effeetive in redueing stress as measured by inereased hand tempershy
ature Whereas the writing produeed more striking inereases the degree to which the relaxation training may have aetually augmented the writshy
ings effeets is not known To explore these issues in greater detail we atshy
tempted to adapt these teehniques to a ehronic pain sample
262
THE ROLE OF
Potel
Aeeording to an ev
tions play functiofl
in helping organisr Chronic pain has o
sponse to a trauma serves the biologic
present and that a
healiacuteng to oeeur
Chronic pain I
6 months often in
bulk of the researe
teristies ofspecifie 1 developiacuteng psychOl
various psyehologi
and affeetive respo
medical and psych
iacutemprovements in 1
Although reseiexcl
eontinues to be a
traek (Wall amp Jone
eoneerns basie defi
fine pain in genera
1989)
The position t
sessment and treal
cliacutenical proeedure pend more on hist
a number of empi
sive management
should determine
fective for a partiacutee Alvarez Cortes amp
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
Srd Persao
-15 a function of Imas Language about traumas 1 data from 372
ble to find a lS during the
ts would evshy
ling the first ease then at
~gative emoshy
temperature gain tremenshy~rature on a
1 writing are
and tempershy
gt the degree
ed the writshyletail we at-
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Potential Value of Disclosure Among Chronic Pain Patients
According to an evolutionary approach negative as well as positive emoshy
tions play functional roles in human behavior Pain too has survival value
in helping organisms avoid further injuries to tissues (Domiacutenguez 1994) Chronic pain has often been distinguished from acute pain which is a reshy
sponse to a trauma and dissipates once healing has taken place Acute pain
serves the biological function of warning the body that tissue damage is present and that a change in behavior may be necessary for repair and
healing to occur
Chronic pain on the other hand is pain that persists for at least 3 to 6 months often in the absence of specific evidence of tissue damage The
bulk of the research on chronic pain has focused on identifying characshyteristics ofspecific pain syndromes (eg headache and chronic back pain)
developing psychometric instruments for assessing pain and delineating various psychological parameters associated with pain such as cognitive
and affective responses Research has also addressed the efficacy of both
medical and psychological treatments on the relief of chronic pain and improvements in behavior despite the subjective reports of pain
Although research in this field has yielded encouraging results pain continues to be a complex phenomenon for clinicians to diagnose and track (Wall amp Iones 1991) One important area where confusion prevails
concerns basic definition For example researchers disagree on how to deshyfine pain in general and how to describe specific syndromes (Flor amp Turk
1989)
The position that the clinician adopts in defining pain has both asshysessment and treatment implications The decision to employ a specific clinical procedure with a particular pain syndrome often appears to deshy
I pend more on history and intuition than on empirical findings Although a number of empirically sound procedures are available for the noninvashy
sive management of chronic pain it remains unclear how the dinician should determine which of these procedures is likely to be the most efshy
fective for a particular patient with a specific pain problem (Domiacutenguez Alvarez Cortes amp Olvera 1993)
263
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
The fastest growing area of research on the assessment of chronie pain
deals with cognitive variables One topie of current interest is patient beshy
liefs about pain One reason for assessing pain beliefs is that they may preshy
diet response to treatment Williams and Thorn (1989) found that patients
who believed that their pain was likely to be a chronie condition failed to
comply with physieal therapy or behavioral therapy assignments
Another cognitive process that is relevant to the understanding of pain
responses-self-efficacy-is based on peoples judgments of their abilities
to execute given levels of performance and to exercise control over events
(Bandura OLeary Taylor Gauthier amp Gossard 1987) Chronie pain pashy
tients differ in the degree to which they view themselves as having conshy
trol over pain (internal or proprioceptive control) versus other external
factors having control over pain (eg inhibition or social sharing of
painful emotional experience)
Coping style reflects another aspect of cognitive processing In a reshy
cent review of coping among chronie pain patients Turner (1991) emshy
phasized the roles of attentional control and other psychologieal factors related to the ability of people to cope with pain First chronie pain pashy
tients who remain passive or who use catastrophizing ignoring and reinshy
terpreting attention diversion and praying and hoping as coping strateshy
giacutees typieally have high levels of physical and psychological disability
Second patients who rate their perceived control as high or who rely on
active or attentional coping function much more effectively Researchers
need to iacutedentify whieh of these constructs is more useful in understandshy
ing pain disability and if there are other basie processes such as active inshy
hibition that support observed variability and outcomes
It has been clear from the beginning that the kind of questions and
answers raised about pain reflect different sets of needs that are not alshy
ways convergent Whereas the scientist seeks to explain data and predict
future emotional and disability states the healthcare expert searches for tools to promote effective treatment optiacuteons The patient of course seeks
pain relief and improved quality of life These divergent needs help exshy
plain the persistence of unresolved issues in the field both in the research
enterprise and in the cliacutenical setting For example the recognition that
THE ROLE
emotion and 1
the important
decades tend 1
the mind (Me published reS4
causes when p ica) interventic
Supported
the disclosure
10gieal variabll
problem Earl tional and psy entation of a
pain resolves ~
Although
chronic pain (]
the majority o
group For thi
healthy group Since 198
vasive treatme
tal of Mexico I
munology seI
outpatient vis sample of 800
By wayof con
who were defi
Labor Stress ~
of the Secreta Training for 1
Initially ~ limitations in
These individ
friends and s
264
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
chronic pain
S patient beshy
leymaypreshy
that patients
ion failed to
ents
lding of pain
heir abilities
1 over events
nic pain pashy
having conshy
her external
1 sharing of
ing In a reshy
(1991) emshy
Igical factors
nie pain pashy
ng and reinshy
)ping strateshy
al disability
whorelyon
Researchers
understandshy
as active in-
Jestions and
tare not alshy
and prediet
searches for
ourse seeks
~ds help exshy
the research
gnition that
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
emotion and biology do not function as isolated entities has been one of
the important advances in thought about pain Still beliefs from earlier
decades tend to perpetuate the view that pain is either in the body or in
the mind (Merskey 1985) In clinical practice (and to a lesser degree in
published research) pain continues to be attributed to psychological
causes when physical findings are lacking and pain persists despite medshy
ical intervention
Supported by several clinical case studies we have begun exploring
the disclosure paradigm as a research strategy to help clarify the psychoshy
logieal variables that increase a patients risk for developing a chronie pain
problem Early prospective studies designed to assess verbal negative emoshy
tional and psychological status soon after an injury or earIy in the presshy
entation of a pain complaint permit comparisons between those whose
pain resolves and those whose pain fails to do so
Although it may be possible to identify a group at increased risk for
chronic pain on the basis of psychological features it does not follow that
the majority of patients whose pain becomes chronie are members of tIshy
group For this to be achieved it is still necessary to compare them v
healthy groups within the same paradigm
Since 1988 we have been involved in a wide assessment and nonh
vasive treatment program for chronic pain patients at the General Hospishy
tal of Mexico City Pain Clinie Data collected by Jose Montes chief of imshy
munology serviees indicated that 12 to 22 of the 41000 monthly
outpatient visits were for headache Our initial research was based on a
sample of 800 chronic pain patients who attended the General Hospital
By way of comparison we were able to identify a group of adult workers
who were defined as clinieally healthy who participated in a program of
Labor Stress Management (1992-1994) that was conducted at the request
of the Secretary of Labor of Mexico as part of its National Program of
Training for Total Quality
Initially we identified subjects in both groups who presented notable
limitations in their capacity to express and communieate emotional states
These individuals considered themselves as isolated and with not many
friends and suggested that 1 dont like it that no one knows what is goshy
265
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
ing on with me Interestingly chronic pain subjects with these charactershy
istics evidenced the highest distress and suffering levels and showed highly
variable physical symptomotology
We started an exploratory clinical study with pain patients that conshy
sisted of biofeedback hypnosis and autogenic relaxation and the stress
disclosure paradigm exercises with the therapeutic target of reducing the
active inhibition mechanism and its psychophysiological consequences
(high systolic pressure and low peripheral temperatures)
Patients were informed that during four sessions they should write
about their painful secrets with the intention of reducing their distress
The instructions for each of the exercises were verbally provided by the
therapist in charge who stayed with the patient during 20 minutes of writ shy
ing Before and after the exercise arterial pressure and pulse were meashy
sured In addition peripheral temperature of the dominant hand was meashy
sured continuously across the sessions At the end of the writing exercise
patients were asked to give a verbal report about their emotions From the
fiacuterst session patients reported different relief levels at the end of writing
which was compared with a relaxation state Overall changes in periphshy
eral temperature from before to after the writing sessions were 2S C
higher than for temperature changes from before to after relaxation
With some patients it was necessary to repeat the writing exercIacutese durshy
ing the days between sessions Preliminary data from 14 chronic pain pashy
tients suggested the temporal patterns of emotional change and periphshy
eral temperature that appeared during the fiacuterst exercise predicted the
ultimate outcomes of the patients Typically patients began writing with
a low temperature (28-30deg C) Within 2 or 3 minutes the temperature inshy
creased (30-33deg C) and then decreased (a mean of 1so C) Finally during
the last 2 or 3 minutes they increased aboye the baseline (3 or more deshy
grees)
When we compare group temperature patterns over time for healthy
subjects with chronic pain patients several differences emerge First psyshy
chophysiological variability is much greater for healthy subjects than for
chronic pain patients Second a smaller proportion of chronic pain pashy
tients could initiate control of skin temperature during biofeedback than
266
THE ROLE
could healthy I
over time dur
would demon
u
Unlike adults
to another Th
For adults in d
tional states 11
duce even mo
or psychologic
intervene with
techniques to 1 from one emo
tions between
lates its lingui
Our expel
stress-affected
shares many e
most importal
can create fav(
tive emotional
cellent exampl
the applicatiOl
able to move i weeks of train
quire a great (
ity to exercIacutese
sary and diffilt In ourop
relaxation res]
bition Interes
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
ie charactershy
lowed highly
ltS that conshy
Id the stress
reducing the
onsequences
iexclhould write
leir distress
Iided by the
utes ofwritshy
e were meashyndwasmeashy
iacuteng exercise
nsFrom the
j of writing
s in periphshy
were 25deg C
axation
~ercise durshy
nie pain pashyand periphshy
redicted the
writing with
tperature inshy
nally during or more de-
e for healthy
e First psyshy
~cts than for
mc pain pashy
edback than
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
could healthy controls Finally the ways that skin temperatures fluctuated
over time during the disclosure-writiacuteng sessiacuteons tended to predict who
would demonstrate faster cliacutenical improvements
USING DISCLOSURE TO ACHIEVE
EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Unlike adults young children can move quickly from one emotional state
to another Through maturation however people tend to lose this ability
For adults in distress it is virtually impossible for them to alter their emoshy
tional states Indeed the act of trying to change their emotions can proshy
duce even more stress When this occurs sorne people look for medical
or psychological help At this point the specialist in human behavior must
intervene with at least two goals in mind (a) to choose the most effective
techniques to help clients acquire greater flexibility in making a transition
from one emotional state to another and (b) to make sense of the relashy
tions between a particular emotional state its psychophysiological correshy
lates its linguistic correlates and social consequences
Qur experience in designing psychological treatment programs for
stress-affected persons in Mexico City has led us to consider that stress
shares many characteristics with negative emotions In this context the
most important therapeutic target is to choose and apply techniques that
can create favorable conditions to allow individuals to pass from a negashy
tiacuteve emotional state to a positive one within a relatively brief time An exshy
cellent example of this kind of psychological interven tiacuteo n can be seen with
the application of relaxatIacuteon techniques wherein a stressed individual is
able to move into a state of serenity within a few minutes after only 2-4
weeks of training Acquiring a voluntary relaxation response does not reshy
quire a great deal of effort on the part of the patient However the abilshy
ity to exercise emotional control in other situations is often more necesshy
sary and difficult to do
In our opinion one factor that hinders peoples abilities to master the
relaxation response is the difficulty of maintaining a state of active inhishy
bition Interestiacutengly the writing-disclosure technique may be ideally suited
267
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
I
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
to reducing active inhibition in chronic pain patients Writing exercises
then may directly and indirectly decrease the psychophysiological effects
of inhibition and at the same time increase the ability of individuals to
pass from one emotional state to another (Apter Fontana amp Murgatroyd
1985)
According to our cliacutenical research findings the main value of the disshy
dosure-writing paradigm liacutees in the kind of emotional reversal process
that can be attained within a short time This emotion reversal abiliacutety reshy
sults when healthy and chronic pain patients attain insight from expressshy
ing and becoming aware of their deepest emotional secrets or pains and
their related thoughts and psychophysiological patterns of response
Of further interest are the open-ended verbal reports that our subshy
jects have given after writing sessions which illustrate positive long-ter m
effects of the disdosure paradigm Specifically dients report that a writshy
ing intervention produces the fastest transition from one emotional state
(eg distress and suffering) to another (eg relaxation) than any other
psychological techniques we have employed induding autogenic training
and biofeedback Even within-session analyses of the skin temperature
change patterns (micro patterns) appear to have diagnostic and predicshy
tive functions both for healthy and chronic pain samples
The empirical fmding that some chronic pain (low back) patients show
an initial in crease in musde activity (EMG) and a delayed return to baseshy
Hne only in the paraspinal musdes and only when verbally discussing pershy
sonally relevant stress (Flor amp Turk 1989) represents addiacutetional support
for what happens physiologically when people put their feelings about seshycret traumatic events into words Finally it is worth noting that successshy
fuI control of physiological activity associated with nonverbalized negashy
tive emotional activity made evident by biofeedback may serve to enhance
patients perceived control regarding their ability to move from one to anshy
other emotional state
REFERENCES
Apter M J Fontana D amp Murgatroyd S (985) Reversal theory Applications and
developments Cardiff Wales University College Cardiff Press
268
THE ROLE
Bandura A O
efficacy a11
sonality al
Barton S (199
495-14
Domiacutenguez B
Badly] El
Domiacutenguez B
iological
icance A
back and ~
Domiacutenguez B
and chaos
Theoryin
timore M
Flor H amp Tur
tients ero
Bulletin 1
Haynes S N J
clinical as
Horgan J (19
72-78
Keefe F (1978
ofBehavio
Kiecolt-Glaser
logical int
Psychologj
Klivington K
Lazarus R S (
ing outloc
Mandler G (1
Goldberge
(2nd Ed)
Merskey H (1
Sciences 8
Pennebaker J implicatio
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
cercises 1effects iuals to
5atroyd
the disshyprocess Iility reshyexpressshytins and Ise ur subshyng-term a wrIacutetshy
nal state ly other training Jerature predicshy
ltsshow to baseshyingpershysupport bout seshysuccessshyd negashyenhance le to anshy
tions and
THE ROLE OF DISCLOSURE AND EMOTIONAL REVERSAL
Bandura A OLeary A Taylor c Gauthier J amp Gossard D (1987) Perceived selfshy
efficacy and pain control Opioid and non-opioid mechanisms iexcloumal of Pershy
sonality and Social Psychology 35 563-571
Barton S (1994) Chaos self-organization and psychology American Psychologist
495-14
Domiacutenguez B (1994) La importancia de sentirse mal [The Importance of Feeling
Badly] El Nacional Dominical 23124-27
Domiacutenguez B Alvarez L M Cortes J amp Olvera Y (1993) Multiple-psychophysshy
iological self-report and other measurement in order to obtain cliacutenical signifshy
icance A case study of chronic pain and synthetic opioid addiction Biacuteofeedshy
back and Self-Regulation 18 159-160
Domiacutenguez B Valderrama P Perez S L amp Meza M A (1994) Relaxation health
and chaos theory Paper presented at Annual Meeting of the Society for Chaos
Theory in Psychology and the Life Sciences The John Hopkins University Balshy
timore MD
Flor H amp Turk D (1989) Psychophysiology of chronic pain Do chronic pain pashy
tients exhibit symptom-specific psychophysiological responses Psychological
Bulletin 105215-259
Haynes S N Huland E S amp Oliveira J (1993) Identifying causal relationships in
cliacutenical assessment Psychological Assessment 5 281-291
Horgan J (1994) Can science explain consciousness Scientific American 270
72-78
Keefe F (1978) Biofeedback VS instructional control of skin temperature iexcloumal
of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Kiecolt-Glaser J K amp Glaser R (1992) Psycho-neuroimmunology Can psychoshy
logical interventions modulate irnmunity iexcloumal of Consulting and Clinical
Psychology 60 569-575
Klivington K (1989) The science of mind Boston MIT Press
Lazarus R S (1993) From psychological stress to the emotions A history of changshy
ing outlooks Annual Review of Psychology 44 1-21
Mandler G (1993) Thought memory and learning Effects of emotional stress In
Goldberger amp Bernitz (Eds) Handbook ofstress Theoretical and cliacutenical aspects
(2nd Ed) New York Free Press
Merskey H (1985) A mentalistic viacuteew of pain and behaviour Behavior and Brain
Sciences 8 65
Pennebaker J (1993) Putting stress into words Health linguistic and therapeutic
implications Behaviour Research and Therapy 31 539-548
269
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (
DOMIacuteNGUEZ ET AL
Selye H (1983) The stress concept Past present and future In C L Cooper (Ed)
Stress research lssues for the eighties New York Wiley
Surwit R (1977) Simple versus complex feedback displays in the training of digishy
tal temperature Journal of Consulting and Clinical Psychology 45 146-147
Surwit R Pilon R amp Fenton C (1978) Behavioral treatment of Raynauds disshy
ease Journal of Behavioral Medicine 1 323-335
Turner J (1991) Coping and chronic pain In M Bond J Charlton amp c Woolf
(Eds) Pain research and clinical management (VoL 4 Proceedings of the 6th
World Congress on Pain) New York Elsevier
Wall P amp Jones M (1991) Defeating pain The war against a silent epidemic New
York Plenum
Williams D amp Thorn B (1989) An empiacuterical assessment of paiacuten beliefs Pain 36
351-358
270
Mel Sharin
1
M ajor nega
known to
ene e traumatie e
ory flashbaeks o
the traumatie si
thoughts and mi
ten persist for lo
an average of 21
71 of investiga
perienee though
repetitive memo
of a major negat
to taIk about th
poorIy doeumer
nebaker 1993) )
reaetions to und
ver amp Wortman
vasive Surveys (